Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Operator’s Manual
GL-Class
GL-Class
1 6 4 5 8 4 7 2 8 2
Order No. 6515 4272 13 Part No. 164 584 72 82 USA Edition D 2007
GL 320 CDI
GL 450
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully,
on the purchase of your new then return it to your vehicle where it
Mercedes-Benz. will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de- signed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and occu-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, pants.
and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Control system .................................. 157 Differential locks* .............................. 206 Rear climate control* ................... 228
Multifunction display.................... 157 A few words about differentials 3-zone automatic climate control*..... 230
Multifunction steering wheel........ 158 and differential locks* .................. 206 Deactivating the automatic
Menus .......................................... 160 Switching differential locks*......... 207 climate control system ................. 234
Standard display menu ................ 164 Good visibility ..................................... 210 Operating the automatic
Audio menu.................................. 166 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 210 climate control system
NAV* menu.................................. 168 Rear view mirrors.......................... 210 in automatic mode........................ 235
Off-road menu.............................. 168 Power folding exterior Setting the temperature ............... 235
DISTRONIC* menu....................... 169 rear view mirrors*......................... 211 Adjusting air distribution .............. 236
Vehicle status message Sun visors ..................................... 213 Adjusting air volume ..................... 237
memory menu.............................. 169 Rear panorama roof sunshade ...... 214 Front defroster ............................. 237
Settings menu.............................. 170 Rear window defroster.................. 215 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 239
Vehicle configuration ................... 185 Climate control................................... 216 Air recirculation mode .................. 239
Trip computer menu..................... 187 Deactivating the Air conditioning ............................ 241
TEL* menu ................................... 189 climate control system ................. 220 Using driver-side settings
Automatic transmission..................... 192 Operating the climate control for all temperature zones.............. 242
Gear selector lever....................... 192 system in automatic mode............ 220 Residual heat and ventilation........ 242
Shifting procedure ....................... 195 Setting the temperature................ 221 Rear automatic climate control..... 243
Transmission positions................. 195 Adjusting air distribution............... 221 Power windows .................................. 248
Driving tips................................... 198 Adjusting air volume ..................... 222 Opening and closing ..................... 248
Gear ranges ................................. 200 Air vents in the roof liner Synchronizing the door windows .. 251
Steering wheel gearshift control .. 201 over the second-row seats*.......... 222 Summer opening feature .............. 251
Emergency operation Front defroster.............................. 223 Convenience closing feature......... 252
(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 202 Air recirculation mode .................. 224
Transfer case..................................... 203 Air conditioning............................. 226
LOW RANGE mode* ..................... 203 Residual heat and ventilation........ 227
Contents
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Light Truck Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Light Truck Center will be glad to inform (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your you of correct care and operating proce-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck dures.
Center will be glad to demonstrate the The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
proper procedures. Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
authorized repair or service facilities fail to
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- Customer Assistance Center
fix one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than One Mercedes Drive
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the
ly notified us in writing of the need for
period of 18 months from original delivery
its repair, or
of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approximately 29 000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Warning! G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you make
sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and
severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
14
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
hicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to signed to help you find information quickly
driver’s seat. you. and easily.
The following publications are part of your
Getting started Operation vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you 앫 this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle. provided as required depending on the
Practical hints equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
16
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to which is a safe distance from the road.
electronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the or repair facility for further inspection or re- risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- pairs. warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the
matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if
necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
19
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
Storage compartments
21
At a glance
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
23
At a glance
Cockpit
24
At a glance
Cockpit
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
30
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part (Vehicles without enhanced Item Page Item Page
off-road package*)
1 COMAND system, see sepa- 8 Storage compartment* 318
rate operating instructions 9 Alarm system indicator 112
2 Climate control 216 lamp
3-zone automatic climate 230 a Electronic Stability Program 107
control* (ESP®) switch
Rear window defroster 215 b Adaptive damping system 280
3 Seat heating*, 140 (ADS)* switch (USA only)
front passenger side c Seat ventilation*, 142
4 Seat ventilation*, 142 driver’s side
front passenger side d Seat heating*, driver’s side 140
5 Parktronic system* 293 e Switch for Downhill Speed 276
deactivation switch Regulation (DSR)
6 Vehicle level control switch 283 f Hazard warning flasher 151
7 Front passenger front air 85, g Switch for Off-road driving 280
bag off indicator lamp 448, program
450
31
At a glance
Center console
32
At a glance
Center console
33
At a glance
Overhead control panel
9 Interior rear view mirror 210 f Front left interior lamp 151
34
At a glance
Door control panel
왔 Door control panel
Item Page
1 Inside door handle 122
2 Central unlocking switch 131
Central locking switch 131
3 Exterior rear view mirror 52
adjustment
4 Selection buttons for exteri- 52
or rear view mirror adjust-
ment
Power-folding exterior rear 211
view mirrors*
5 Switches for opening/clos- 248
ing front and rear door
windows
6 Rear door window override 100
switch
7 Hinged quarter window 250
switch*
8 Remote tailgate release 126
switch, power tailgate* 125
35
At a glance
Storage compartments
36
At a glance
Storage compartments
37
38
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
39
Getting started
Unlocking
40
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Grasp an outside door handle. Starter switch positions
All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock or unlock the vehicle without using
hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
Warning! G
the remote control buttons on the
system is disarmed. The locator light-
SmartKey and start the engine without in- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ing comes on if the feature is enabled
serting the SmartKey into the starter SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
in the control system (컄 page 179).
switch. from the starter switch, take it with you and
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with i If the vehicle has been parked for more than lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
from the respective door. 왘 Enter the vehicle. access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
Warning! G KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 117).
41
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey mains on after starting the engine or ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 436). ly charged.
3 Starting position 앫 Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄 page 530).
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except high beam head- 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 538).
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster completely discharged battery, always remove
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex- the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and engine is not in operation.
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go
Starter switch out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical con- i When the SmartKey is removed from the
sumers, such as seat adjustment starter switch and the automatic transmission is
in a position other than P, the automatic trans-
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical mission automatically shifts to P.
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
42
Getting started
Unlocking
43
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0 Ignition (or Position 2) i When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board button twice. tor lamps unless activated) in the instrument
electronics have status 0 (as with cluster come on. The indicator and warning
This supplies power for all electrical
SmartKey removed). lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
consumers.
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
Position 1 All lamps (except high beam headlamp should go out when the engine is running. This
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator indicates that the respective systems are
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop operational.
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
button once. ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the For information on starting the engine
This supplies power for some electrical instrument cluster fails to come on using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
consumers, such as seat adjustment. when the ignition is switched on, have see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
it checked and replaced if necessary. If (컄 page 59).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
start/stop button For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see
mains on after starting the engine or
앫 once more, the ignition (position 2) is “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*”
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
switched on
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 436). (컄 page 117).
앫 twice more, the power supply is again
switched off i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once more, the power supply
is again switched off.
44
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Seats
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can Warning! G
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 54).
Observe the following points: When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
G
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning! 앫 Adjust the backrest until your arms are
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
slightly angled when holding the steer-
lock the vehicle.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. ing wheel
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause 앫 Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. position that still allows you to reach the with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po- starter switch or the SmartKey with
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
sition should be as far back as possible KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
backrest in an excessively reclined position
with the driver still able to operate the the power seats can be operated when the
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
controls properly. respective door is open.
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- 앫 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as Therefore, do not leave children unattended
close to the head as possible and the in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
center of the head restraint supports the vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
back of the head at eye level.
belts provide the best restraint when the vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
45
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment
Warning! G Warning! G The seat adjustment switch is located on
Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag deactiva- According to accident statistics, children the entry side of each front seat base.
tion system, Canada only: are safer when properly restrained in the
Children 12 years old and under must never rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ride in the front seat, except in a ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM that children be placed in the rear seats
compatible child seat, which operates with whenever possible. Regardless of seating
the BabySmartTM system installed in the position, children 12 years old and under
vehicle to deactivate the front passenger must be seated and properly secured in an
front air bag when it is properly installed. appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag restraint, or booster seat recommended for
when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, the size and weight of the child. For addi-
serious or fatal injury will result. tional information, see “Children in the vehi- 1 Head restraint height (vehicles with
cle” (컄 page 93). memory function)*
2 Seat cushion tilt
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
3 Seat height
significantly increased if the child restraints
4 Backrest tilt
are not properly secured in the vehicle
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
46
Getting started
Adjusting
! When moving the seats, make sure there are 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42). Seat fore and aft adjustment
no items in the footwell or behind the seats;
or 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
otherwise you could damage the seats.
in direction of arrow 5.
Vehicles with memory function*:
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, e.g. for cargo compartment expansion 왘 Open the respective door. Seat height
(컄 page 306), the front seats may not be moved
The seat can be adjusted with the 왘 Press the switch up or down in
to the rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats. respective door opened. direction of arrow 3.
or
! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and Seat cushion tilt
head restraint height, make sure the sun visor is Vehicles without memory function*:
folded up (컄 page 213). If the head restraint is in 왘 Press the switch up or down in
the uppermost position, it could hit and damage 왘 The seat can be adjusted within direction of arrow 2 until your upper
the sun visor. 3 minutes after either front door has legs are lightly supported.
been opened.
i The memory function* (컄 page 143) lets
you store the settings for the seat positions Seat backrest tilt
together with the settings for the steering wheel 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
column and the exterior rear view mirrors.
in direction of arrow 4.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height ! Do not attempt to remove front seat head Raising:
restraints. They can only be removed by qualified
왘 Manually adjust the height of head
G
technicians. We recommend that you have this
Warning! work carried out by an authorized restraint 1 by pulling it upward.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. If head restraint 1 is fully retracted,
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Vehicles with memory function*: push release button 2 in direction of
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
arrow and pull head restraint 1 up-
ed to help reduce injuries during an 왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 46) up or ward.
accident. down in direction of arrow.
Lowering:
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to Vehicles without memory function*:
move the respective head restraint up from 왘 To lower head restraint 1, push
the lowest non-use position and have the release button 2 in direction of arrow
occupant adjust the head restraint properly. and press down on head restraint 1.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned and engaged head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
tential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation. 1 Head restraint
2 Release button
48
Getting started
Adjusting
This feature allows for easier entry into and Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
exit from the vehicle. When entering and hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in Children could open the driver’s door and
its uppermost position. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
The easy-entry/exit feature can be and/or serious personal injury.
activated or deactivated in the Comfort
submenu of the control system With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
Manually adjust the angle of the head (컄 page 184).
restraint. the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you:
왘 While seated, reach behind you with Warning! G 앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition
both hands and find lower edge of the
head restraint. switched on
You must make sure no one can become
왘 Adjust the head restraint to the desired trapped or injured by the moving steering or
position by pushing or pulling on the wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is 앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter
lower edge of the head restraint cush- activated. switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
ion. To stop steering wheel movement, do one of start/stop button (컄 page 43) once
For more information, see “Seats” the following: with the driver’s door closed
(컄 page 132). 앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
(컄 page 52).
49
Getting started
Adjusting
50
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical* i The memory function* (컄 page 143) lets
you store the settings for the steering wheel col-
G
umn together with the settings for seat positions
Warning! and the exterior rear view mirrors.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv- Make sure that
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- 앫 you can reach the steering wheel with
ing could cause the driver to lose control of your arms slightly bent at the elbows
the vehicle.
앫 you can move your legs freely
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 앫 all displays (including malfunction and
1 Release handle indicator lamps) on the instrument
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
왘 To unlock the steering column, pull lock the vehicle. cluster are clearly visible
release handle 1 out to its stop limit. The steering wheel adjustment stalk is
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
왘 Move steering wheel to the desired KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter located on the lower left of the steering
position. switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* column.
왘 Push release handle 1 back to its removed from the vehicle, the steering
original position to relock the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated
column. when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehi-
The steering column is locked into po- cle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
sition again. child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
왘 Make sure the steering column is could result in an accident and/or serious
securely locked by trying to move the personal injury.
steering wheel up and down as well as
in and out before driving off.
51
Getting started
Adjusting
52
Getting started
Adjusting
i If you do not make adjustments to the ! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear view
selected exterior rear view mirror within mirrors*:
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You will If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly
then have to select the desired exterior rear view pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
mirror again before any adjustments can be pushed rearward (hit from the front), press fold
made. Adjustments can only be made with the button 1 (컄 page 212) to fold mirrors in, then
indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear press fold button 1 (컄 page 212) again to fold
view mirror button illuminated. mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired The mirror housing is then properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man-
setting. ner.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly i The memory function* (컄 page 143) lets
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
you store the settings for the exterior rear view
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
mirrors together with the setting for the steering
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
wheel column and the seat positions.
place. The mirror housing is then properly posi-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear
manner. view mirrors will be heated automatically.
53
Getting started
Driving
Fastening the seat belts seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
Warning! G (컄 page 88).
54
Getting started
Driving
55
Getting started
Driving
왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt out 왘 Press release button 1 and move the
of seat belt outlet 1. seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
Proper use of seat belts
lap portion across your hips.
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening.
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3
(컄 page 56) until it clicks. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to portion is located as close as possible
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion to the middle of the shoulder (it should
up. not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
Seat belt height adjustment arm. For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet
(컄 page 56).
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
1 Seat belt outlet across the abdomen.
2 Latch plate
앫 Place the seat backrest in a position
3 Buckle
4 Release button that is as upright as possible.
1 Release button
56
Getting started
Driving
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one Starting the engine
person at a time. Warning! G
앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the same
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They Warning! G
could tear.
time. When using a seat belt to secure
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
infant or toddler restraints or children
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
in booster seats, always follow the
This could damage the belt. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
consciousness and possible death.
Never attempt to make modifications to
앫 Check your seat belt periodically Do not run the engine in confined areas
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
during travel to make sure that it is (such as a garage) which are not properly
ness of the belts.
properly positioned. ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
snugly. Take special care of this when have the cause determined and corrected
not be able to provide adequate protection.
wearing loose clothing. immediately. If you must drive under these
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly conditions, drive only with at least one win-
stressed in an accident must be replaced. dow fully open.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
57
Getting started
Driving
58
Getting started
Driving
59
Getting started
Driving
60
Getting started
Driving
61
Getting started
Driving
It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans- For more information, see “Driving instruc-
mission out of P or N if the engine speed is tions” (컄 page 349).
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not For information on off-road driving, see
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could “Off-road driving” (컄 page 357).
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You Exterior lamp switch
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
1 Off
someone or something. Only shift into gear
2 Low beam headlamps on
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps come on.
62
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
왘 Push the combination switch in
왘 Press the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1.
direction of arrow 1 or 2.
The high beam headlamp indicator
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
lamp L or K in the instrument
comes on (컄 page 26).
cluster flashes (컄 page 26). Combination switch
For more information on headlamps, see
1 Single wipe
“Lighting” (컄 page 145).
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
63
Getting started
Driving
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42). If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the Intermittent wiping
combination switch position U or V,
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when 앫 set the combination switch to the next
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on wet weather conditions or in the presence
higher wiper speed
a windshield might scratch the glass and/or of precipitation.
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on 앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light When you select intermittent wiping, the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, Truck Center rain sensor is activated. The rain sensor
always operate the windshield wipers with wind- automatically sets a suitable wiping
shield washer fluid (컄 page 65). Switching on windshield wipers interval depending on the wetness of the
왘 sensor surface.
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers Turn the combination switch to the
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate- desired position depending on the ! Do not leave windshield wipers on an inter-
ly. intensity of the rain. mittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe M Windshield wipers off automatic car wash or during windshield clean-
location and ing. Wipers will operate in the presence of water
앫 remove SmartKey from starter switch U Slow intermittent wiping sprayed on the windshield, and windshield
Rain sensor operation with low wipers may be damaged as a result.
or
sensitivity.
앫 turn off the engine by pressing the ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
V Fast intermittent wiping the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s Rain sensor operation with high may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
door open, starter switch is in sensitivity.
position 0, same as with SmartKey windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
removed from starter switch) u Slow continuous wiping You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
before attempting to remove any blockage. t Fast continuous wiping
왘 Turn the combination switch to
앫 Remove blockage.
position U or V.
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again.
64
Getting started
Driving
After the initial wipe, pauses between Wiping with windshield washer fluid Rear window wiper/washer
wipes are automatically controlled by the
왘 Press the combination switch in direc-
rain sensor. The combination switch is located on the
tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
left of the steering column.
i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the point.
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
The windshield wipers operate with
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
of the vehicle from being sprayed. washer fluid.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all i To prevent smears on the windshield or
doors are closed and noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
앫 the automatic transmission is set to windshield washer fluid every now and then even
position D or R when it is raining.
65
Getting started
Driving
66
Getting started
Driving
67
Getting started
Parking and locking
68
Getting started
Parking and locking
69
Getting started
Parking and locking
컄컄! Observe instructions when taking the Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* If you have started the engine with the
vehicle through an automatic conveyor type KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and can-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
car wash (컄 page 428). not turn it off as described above:
button (컄 page 43) to turn off the
engine. 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Turning off with the SmartKey
button from the starter switch.
With the driver’s door closed, the start-
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
er switch is now in position 1. With the 왘 Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
to position 0 (컄 page 41).
driver’s door opened, the starter switch into the starter switch.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter is set to position 0, same as SmartKey The engine turns off. The starter switch
switch. removed from starter switch is in position 0 (컄 page 41).
The immobilizer is activated. (컄 page 41).
! If you turn off the engine using the i In an emergency you can turn off the engine
SmartKey and remove the SmartKey from the while driving by pressing and holding the
starter switch, the transmission will shift to KEYLESS-GO start/stop button for
position P automatically. Keep in mind that approximately 3 seconds.
turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone
will not automatically shift the transmission to
! If you turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a front
position P.
door, the transmission will shift to position P
automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the
engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
alone will not automatically shift the transmis-
sion to position P.
70
Getting started
Parking and locking
Releasing seat belts Locking i If you hear a warning signal you have
forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
왘 Press the seat belt release button opening the driver’s door.
(컄 page 56). Warning! G In addition the message Switch off lights
Allow the retractor to completely re- appears in the multifunction display.
To prevent possible personal injury, always Switch off the headlamps.
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
keep hands and fingers away from the door
plate.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- ! Failure to switch off the headlamps when
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that cially careful when small children are leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get around. battery.
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat 왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a the tailgate.
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim door during closing.
panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact Warning! G
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
71
Getting started
Parking and locking
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- Air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
portant facts about the restraint systems the ignition is switched on and in regular
앫 Front passenger front air bag off
of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
indicator lamp (컄 page 85)
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The restraint systems are
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 88) Classification System* (OCS) cluster (컄 page 26) comes on when the
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 99) (컄 page 81) ignition is switched on and goes out no
앫 Canada only: later than a few seconds after the engine
앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for was started.
Front passenger seat with
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 97)
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation The SRS components are in operational
Additional protection potential provide system (컄 page 87) readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Although independent systems, their lit when the engine is running.
with protective functions work in conjunction A malfunction in the system has been
앫 Air bags (컄 page 76) with each other. detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash i For information on infants and children 앫 fails to go out not later than approxi-
sensors) traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint mately 4 seconds after the engine was
systems for infants and children, see “Children started
앫 Emergency Tensioning Device in the vehicle” (컄 page 93).
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 91) 앫 does not come on at all
앫 Seat belt force limiter (컄 page 91) 앫 comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
앫 Active head restraints (컄 page 92)
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-
ble rearward, still permitting proper op-
eration of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast-
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal properly seated position and to wear their 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side respective seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina-
impact air bags and window curtain air bags) For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
or rollovers (window curtain air bags). steering wheel. If you have any
collision always be in normal seated position
However, no system available today can problems, please see an authorized
with your back against the seat backrest.
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to
The deployment of the air bags temporarily properly positioned on your body
the steering wheel or dashboard.
releases a small amount of dust from the air (컄 page 54).
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
speed and force, a proper seating and hands side the rim can increase the risk and
the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- on steering wheel position will help to keep potential severity of hand/arm injury
porary breathing difficulty for people with you at a safe distance from the air bag. when driver’s front air bag inflates.
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
or too close to the air bag can be seriously possible rearward from the dashboard
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates when the seat is occupied.
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the with great force in the blink of an eye:
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
앫 Sit properly belted in a position that is as
fresh air by opening a window or door.
upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
Warning! G designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
Only use seat covers which have been based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera-
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers Vehicles with OCS* only:
may interfere with or prevent the On the front passenger-side, the front air bag
deployment of the front side impact air bags deployment is additionally influenced by the
or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact an passenger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
(컄 page 81).
Center for availability.
Vehicles with OCS* only:
1 Driver air bag The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
When you sell your vehicle we strongly 2 Passenger air bag the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
urge you to give notice to the subsequent for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
Driver and front passenger front air bags
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
are deployed:
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual. 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫 independently of the side impact air
bags
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The air bags will not deploy in impacts Side impact air bags, window curtain
which do not exceed the system’s deploy- air bags
ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
ted by the fastened seat belts.
Warning! G
The front passenger front air bag will only
be deployed if: The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control are located in the doors. Do not
앫 the system senses that the front
modify any components of the doors or door
passenger seat is occupied
trim panels including, for example, the addi-
앫 the 59 indicator lamp in tion of door speakers.
the center console is not lit 1 Front side impact air bag
Improper repair work on the doors or the
(컄 page 85) 2 Window curtain air bag
modification or addition of components to
3 Rear side impact air bag*
앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy- the doors create a risk of rendering the
ment threshold side impact air bags inoperative or causing The side impact air bags and window
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the curtain air bags are deployed:
! Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag doors must therefore only be performed by
deactivation system, Canada only: 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
Do not place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
the front passenger seat. This could cause the
front or side impact air bag on the front passen- ment threshold
ger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the 앫 independently of the front air bags
system’s deployment threshold.
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers.
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The side impact air bags and window cur- Occupant Classification System*
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts Warning! G
which do not exceed the system’s deploy- The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
ment threshold. Only use seat covers which have been test- automatically turns the front passenger
ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your front air bag on or off based on the classi-
Vehicles with OCS* only: vehicle model. Using other seat covers may fied occupant weight category determined
The front passenger side impact air bag interfere with or prevent the deployment of by weight sensor readings from the front
will not deploy if the OCS senses that the the front side impact air bags or the rear passenger seat.
front passenger seat is empty and the front side impact air bags*. Contact your autho-
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for i The system does not deactivate the front
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With passenger side impact air bag, the window
availability.
an empty front passenger seat and the curtain air bag, and the emergency tensioning
seat belt fastened (latch plate properly in- device.
serted into buckle) the front passenger Occupants must sit properly belted in a
side impact air bag will deploy indepen- position that is as upright as possible with
dently of the empty seat. their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean-
ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able
to properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
Children can be killed or seriously injured by 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child 앫 If you have to place a child in a
an inflating air bag. Note the following restraint on the front passenger seat forward-facing child restraint on the
important information when circumstances because circumstances require you to front passenger seat, move the seat as
require you to place a child in the front pas- do so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
senger seat: 59 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the
nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag ger front air bag is deactivated. Should secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
technology designed to turn off the front the 59 indicator lamp not seat belt according to the child seat
passenger front air bag in your vehicle illuminate or go out while the restraint is manufacturer’s instructions. For
when the system senses the weight of a installed, please check installation. children larger than the typical
typical 12-month-old child or less along Periodically check the 12-month-old child, the front passenger
with the weight of a standard appropri- 59 indicator lamp while front air bag may or may not be
ate child restraint on the front passen- driving to make sure the activated (컄 page 83).
ger seat. 59 indicator lamp is illumi-
앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on nated. If the 59 indicator
the front passenger seat will be serious- lamp goes out or remains out, do not
ly injured or even killed if the front transport a child on the front passenger
passenger front air bag inflates in a seat until the system has been repaired.
collision which could occur under some A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
circumstances, even with the air bag the front passenger seat will be serious-
technology installed in your vehicle. The ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
only means to completely eliminate this senger front air bag inflates.
risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac-
ing child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing child
restraint in the back seat.
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does The 59 indicator lamp is
not mean that the front passenger front air bag located in the center console. Warning! G
also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 81) If the 1 indicator lamp and the
may have determined: 59 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical Occupant Classification System. The front
12-month-old child seated in a standard passenger front air bag will be deactivated
child restraint – both instances where the in this case. Have the system checked as
system suppresses deployment of the front soon as possible by qualified technicians.
passenger front air bag even though the im- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
pact met the criteria and was of sufficient Truck Center.
severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
앫 that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
1 59 indicator lamp In order to ensure proper operation of the
ual (such as a young teenager or a small air bag system and OCS:
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will
adult) or a child weighing more than the be illuminated, except with the SmartKey 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a the parcel net on the back of the front
removed from the starter switch or with
standard child restraint – instances where passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS
the system may suppress deployment of the the starter switch in position 0
(컄 page 41). may not be able to properly approximate
front passenger front air bag even though the occupant weight category.
the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
cient severity to deploy the driver front air 앫 Do not place objects under and/or
bag. around the front passenger seat. 컄컄
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM without special Never place anything between seat cushion
child seat installed and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
After turning the SmartKey in the starter tem. The bottom of the child seat must
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the make full contact with the passenger seat
1 59 indicator lamp KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
Special BabySmartTM compatible child twice, the 59 indicator lamp could cause injuries to the child in case of an
seats, designed for use with the located in the center console comes on for accident, instead of protecting the child.
Mercedes-Benz system, are required for approximately 6 seconds and then goes
out. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
use with the BabySmartTM air bag deactiva-
installation of special child seats.
tion system. Please contact an authorized If the 59 indicator lamp
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for in- should not come on or is continuously lit,
formation on availability. With the special the system is not functioning. You must
child seat properly installed, the front pas- see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
senger front air bag will not deploy. Truck Center before seating any child on
the passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 450).
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts
Warning! G Warning! G
The use of seat belts and infant and child
When using a BabySmartTM compatible child Do not place powered-on laptops, cell restraint system is required by law in all
seat on the front passenger seat, the front phones, electronic tags such as those used 50 states, the District of Columbia, the
passenger front air bag will not deploy only in ski passes and like electronic devices on U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
if the 59 indicator lamp re- the front passenger seat. Signals from such
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
mains illuminated. devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
occupants should have their seat belts
Please be sure to check the indicator every system. Such signal interference may cause
fastened whenever the vehicle is in
time you use the special system child seat. the 59 indicator lamp not to
motion.
Should the indicator lamp go out while the come on during self-test or be continuously
restraint is installed, please check installa- lit, indicating that the system is not function- For more information, see “Fastening the
tion. If the indicator lamp remains out, do ing. seat belts” (컄 page 54).
not use the BabySmartTM restraint to trans- i For information on infants and children
port children on the front passenger seat un- traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
til the system has been repaired. systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 93).
88
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
90
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt seat belt force limiter
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
telltale < will always illuminate The seat belts for the front and second-row
warning chime sounds with increasing
for 6 seconds to remind you and your outer seats are equipped with emergency
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
passengers to fasten your seat belts. tensioning devices and seat belt force lim-
or until the driver’s and the front
iters. The seat belts for the third-row seats
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened passenger’s seat belt are fastened
are equipped with emergency tensioning
when the engine is started, an additional
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s devices.
warning chime will also sound for a maxi-
seat belt remains unfastened after
mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s The ETD is designed to activate in the
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
seat belt is fastened. following cases:
sounding, the seat belt telltale <
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the stops flashing but continues to be illu- 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front minated. exceeding the system deployment
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened threshold
with front doors closed, The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and the front passen- 앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illu- ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger 앫 if the restraint systems are operational
minated for as long as either the driv- seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle and functioning correctly, see
er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not is standing still and a front door is opened. 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 445)
fastened
For more information, see “Practical hints”
i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
(컄 page 443). vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened
(latch plate properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats (second-row
seats) or rear seats (third-row seats) will activate
with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
92
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
You cannot remove the active head Rear head restraints Children in the vehicle
restraint on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats. If an infant or child is traveling with you in
For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G the vehicle:
we recommend that you contact an 왘 Secure the child using an infant or child
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
restraint appropriate to the age and
Center. head restraints installed when the rear seats
size of the child.
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
For information on head restraint adjust- 왘 Make sure the infant or child is
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 45). properly secured at all times while the
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
For information on resetting the activated vehicle is in motion.
move the respective head restraint up from
active head restraints, see “Resetting acti- the lowest non-use position and have the
vated head restraints” (컄 page 504). occupant adjust the head restraint properly. Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
Do not leave children unattended in the
positioned head restraints.
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child re-
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that straint system. The children could
it is as close to the head as possible and the
앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for 앫 be seriously or fatally injured through
injury to the head and neck in the event of excessive exposure to extreme heat or
an accident or similar situation. cold 컄컄
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Infant and child restraint systems seat must be in the most backward posi-
Do not expose the child restraint system to
tion. The seat belt can again be used in the
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s We recommend all infants and children be
usual manner.
metal parts, for example, could become very properly restrained at all times while the
hot, and the child could be burned on these vehicle is in motion.
parts.
Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag Warning! G
If children open a door, they could deactivation system, Canada only:
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
앫 injure other persons Only use a BabySmartTM compatible child
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
restraint for the front passenger seat in
앫 get out of the car and injure themselves belt retractor will be deactivated.
this vehicle.
or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors i For information on child seats with mounting
passenger or cargo compartment unless fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation
they are firmly secured in place. For more in- for secure fastening of child restraints. of infant and child restraint system”
formation, see “Loading” (컄 page 297) and To fasten a child restraint, follow child (컄 page 99).
“Useful features” (컄 page 316). restraint instructions for mounting. Then For information on LATCH-type child seat
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo pull the shoulder belt out completely and mounts, see “Child seat anchors – LATCH type”
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a (컄 page 97).
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate The use of infant or child restraints is re-
that the special seat belt retractor is acti- quired by law in all 50 states, the District
앫 strong braking maneuvers
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
앫 sudden changes of direction on child restraint to take up any slack. Canadian provinces.
앫 an accident
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. To deacti-
vate the special seat belt retractor for the
front passenger seat, the front passenger
94
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
95
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
Always sit as upright as possible, properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child
use the seat belts and use an appropriately the front passenger seat will be serious- restraint on the front passenger seat be-
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or ly injured or even killed if the front cause circumstances require you to do
booster seat recommended for the size and passenger front air bag inflates in a so, make sure that the
weight of the child. collision which could occur under some 59 indicator lamp is illumi-
circumstances, even with the air bag nated, indicating that the front passen-
Children can be killed or seriously injured by technology installed in your vehicle. The ger front air bag is deactivated. Should
an inflating air bag. Note the following im- only means to completely eliminate this the 59 indicator lamp not
portant information when circumstances risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac- illuminate or go out while the restraint is
require you to place a child in the front ing child restraint in the front seat. We installed, please check installation.
passenger seat: therefore strongly recommend that you Periodically check the
always place a child in a rear-facing child 59 indicator lamp while
앫 Vehicles with OCS* only: restraint in the back seat. driving to make sure the lamp is illumi-
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag nated. If the 59 indicator
technology designed to turn off the front lamp goes out or remains out, do not
passenger front air bag in your vehicle transport a child on the front passenger
when the OCS senses the weight of a seat until the system has been repaired.
typical 12-month-old child or less along A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
with the weight of a standard the front passenger seat will be serious-
appropriate child restraint on the front ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
passenger seat. senger front air bag inflates.
96
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Do not leave children unattended in the A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a proper belt positioning for children over
Infants and small children should never child restraint system. 41 lb until they reach a height where a
share a seat belt with another occupant. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
During an accident, they could be crushed could result in an accident and/or serious booster.
between the occupant and seat belt. personal injury. Install child seat according to manufactu-
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is rer’s instructions.
significantly increased if the child restraints The child seat must be firmly attached to the
are not properly secured in the vehicle right and left side anchors 2 (컄 page 98). 컄컄
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
97
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
98
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint 왘 Move the respective head restraint to
system its uppermost position (컄 page 137).
This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at the
second-row seat backrest. For installing an
infant and child restraint system at the
third-row seats, use the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment
(컄 page 305).
2 Anchorage ring
3 Hook
2 Anchorage ring
i For safety, make sure hook 3 has attached 3 Hook
to anchorage ring 2 beyond the safety catch, as
illustrated. 4 Top tether strap
왘 Guide top tether strap 4 between
head restraint and top of seat backrest.
99
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Securely fasten hook 3, which is part Blocking of rear door window operation
of the tether strap 4, to anchorage Warning! G
ring 2. With the override switch you can disable
After installing top tether straps, make sure the rear side window switches in the rear
Make sure that the seat backrests are in an upright po- door panels.
앫 the top tether strap is not twisted sition and are properly locked. Check for
G
secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
앫 the head restraint is installed and Warning!
seat backrests. If a seat backrest is not
positioned such that the top tether
properly locked, the seat backrest could
strap can pass freely between the Activate the override switch when children
fold. The child seat would no longer be prop-
head restraint and top of seat back- are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
erly supported or positioned to provide its
rest The children could otherwise injure them-
intended benefit.
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
앫 top tether strap is positioned be-
dow opening.
tween the seat backrest and the
왘 Lower the head restraint if necessary
cargo compartment cover blind (if When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
(컄 page 137).
installed) SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Make sure the top tether strap can from the starter switch, take it with you, and
앫 the top tether strap is positioned pass freely between the head restraint lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
between the seat backrest and the and top of seat backrest. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
cargo net* (if installed)
왘 Install the child restraint system and unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
tighten the top tether strap according access to a vehicle could result in an
to the child restraint manufacturer’s in- accident and/or serious personal injury.
structions.
100
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
101
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
102
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) accidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
앫 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
The driving safety systems described in this effectiveness.
section cannot reduce these risks or pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
on the vehicle. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
Always adapt your driving style to the pre- not lock during braking. This allows you to
vailing road and weather conditions and maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
keep a safe distance to other road users and The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
objects in the street. proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
i In winter operation, the maximum effective- On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
®
ness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP , the EBP, and
respond even to light brake pressure.
the 4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires
(컄 page 420) or snow chains as required. The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 26) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
103
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
104
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS ESP®
Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run-
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning. It monitors the vehicle’s traction
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that (force of adhesive friction between the
tially reducing braking distance. afforded by the condition of the vehicle tires and the road surface) and handling.
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
until the emergency braking situation is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
over. applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
and by limiting engine output, the ESP®
The ABS will prevent the wheels from or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
locking. skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
especially useful while driving off and on
When you release the brake pedal, the capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
brakes function again as normal. The BAS never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
also helps stabilize the vehicle during
is then deactivated. ous manner which could jeopardize the
braking and steering maneuvers.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
Warning! G ment cluster (컄 page 26) flashes when the
ESP® is engaged.
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem is still functioning, but without the addi- The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
tional brake boost available that BAS would ment cluster comes on when you switch on
normally provide in an emergency braking the ignition. It goes out when the engine is
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance running.
may increase.
105
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
106
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP® i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
Warning! G more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster
Warning! G Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore- flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
mentioned circumstances do not apply any- stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP® should not be switched off during
more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize The ESP® switch is located on the upper
normal driving other than in the circum-
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a part of the center console.
stances described below. Disabling of the
wheel is spinning.
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers.
When you switch off the ESP®
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted. 앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫 the engine output is not limited, which
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch allows the drive wheels to spin and
off the ESP® in driving situations where it thus cut into surfaces for better grip
would be advantageous to have the drive 앫 the 4-ETS will still apply the brake to a
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for spinning wheel
better grip such as: 1 ESP® switch
앫 the ESP® continues to operate when
앫 when driving with snow chains you are braking 왘 With the engine running, press ESP®
앫 in deep snow switch 1.
앫 you cannot activate the cruise control
앫 in sand or gravel or the Distronic* system The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫 the cruise control or the Distronic*
system switch off if currently activated The ESP® is deactivated.
107
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
For more information, see “Practical hints” The ESP® Trailer Stabilization is functional
Warning! G (컄 page 435). at vehicle speeds above approximately
40 mph (65 km/h) when the ESP® is
When the ESP® warning lamp v is Off-road – ESP® switched on.
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a With the off-road driving program switched
malfunction. on (컄 page 279), or with the transmission Warning G
in LOW RANGE* mode (컄 page 203), the
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- ESP® designed for off-road use is automat- The system will not be able to assist when
ing road conditions and to the non-operating ically activated. At speeds below 27 mph the trailer jackknifes
status of the ESP®. (45 km/h), the ESP® assists in over-/un- 앫 on wet or icy roads
dersteering, thus improving vehicle trac-
앫 on roads with slippery surface
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex- tion.
tended period of time with the ESP® switched 앫 in sand or gravel
off. This may cause serious damage to the ®
ESP Trailer Stabilization Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip
drivetrain which is not covered by the over before the system recognizes swaying
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If the trailer you are towing should begin to
of the trailer.
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
Switching on the ESP® immediately applying the brakes hard.
Steering during this maneuver will not help i If the ESP® has switched off due to a mal-
왘 Press ESP® switch 1. function, ESP® cannot stabilize the rig.
to stabilize the rig.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the ESP® will assist you in such situations.
instrument cluster goes out. ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts
You are now again in normal driving swaying and will apply the brakes to re-
mode. duce the vehicle speed to a non-critical
speed that allows the vehicle-trailer combi-
nation to stabilize.
108
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
EBP 4-ETS
Warning! G
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize When you see ESP® warning lamp v
greater proportion of the braking effort available traction, especially under flashing in the instrument cluster, then pro-
without a loss of vehicle stability. slippery road conditions. The brakes are ceed as follows:
applied to the spinning wheel and power is 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
Warning! G transferred to the wheel(s) with traction. as possible.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys- ment cluster, starts to flash at any vehicle tor.
tem is still functioning. However, the rear speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
wheels may lock during hard braking, caus- the wheel begins to spin. the prevailing road conditions.
ing you to lose control over the vehicle and Failure to observe these guidelines could
possibly causing an accident. Adjust your i If conditions require, switch on off-road
driving program (컄 page 279) or LOW RANGE* cause the vehicle to skid.
driving style to the non-operating status of
mode (컄 page 203). The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul-
the EBP.
ting from excessive speed.
109
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
! Operational or performance test must only i If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is being
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized switched off temporarily to prevent overheating
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or message ESP inoperative See Operator’s
the transfer case which is not covered by the Manual appears in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For more information, see the “Practical
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, hints” section (컄 page 436) and
the engine and ignition must be shut off (컄 page 451).
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in Off-road - 4-ETS
position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake
on a brake test dynamometer and such testing With the off-road driving program switched
should be no longer than 10 seconds. on (컄 page 279), or with the transmission
Active braking action through the ESP® may in LOW RANGE* mode (컄 page 203), the
otherwise seriously damage the brake system 4-ETS designed for off-road use is auto-
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz matically activated.
Limited Warranty.
110
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer With KEYLESS-GO* The alarm system will also be triggered
when
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
앫 the vehicle is opened with the mechan-
persons from starting your vehicle. i Starting the engine will also deactivate the ical key, see “Unlocking the vehicle”
immobilizer.
(컄 page 500)
Activating In case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not 앫 a door is opened from the inside, see
With the SmartKey operational. Contact an authorized “Opening the doors from the inside”
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call (컄 page 122)
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
switch. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is
With KEYLESS-GO* Anti-theft alarm system initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄 page 332) provided that the Tele Aid service
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop was subscribed to and properly activated, and
button (컄 page 43) on the starter Once the alarm system has been armed, a
that necessary cellular service and GPS cover-
switch once. visual and audible alarm is triggered when age are available.
someone opens
The engine is turned off.
앫 a door
왘 Open the driver’s door.
앫 the tailgate
Deactivating 앫 the hood
The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
With the SmartKey
ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch diately closed.
to position 2 (컄 page 41).
111
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three Canceling the alarm
times, one of the following elements may not be
The alarm system indicator lamp is located To cancel the alarm:
properly closed:
to the lower left of the hazard warning
flasher. 앫 a door With the SmartKey
앫 the tailgate
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
Close the respective element and lock the switch.
vehicle again.
or
Disarming the alarm system 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
왘 Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey SmartKey.
or with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 40).
With KEYLESS-GO*
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is 왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
1 Alarm system indicator lamp disarmed. Indicator lamp 1 goes out. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
i The alarm system will rearm automatically be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 71). again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a or
door nor the tailgate is opened.
The turn signal lamps flash three times 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
to indicate that the vehicle is locked. button (컄 page 43).
The alarm system is armed within ap- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
proximately 10 seconds. Alarm system be inside the vehicle.
indicator lamp 1 flashes.
112
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Transfer case
Differential locks*
Good visibility
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control*
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and un-
find detailed information on how to oper- locking, see the “Getting started” section
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. (컄 page 40) and (컄 page 71).
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will SmartKey
be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are The locking tabs for the mechanical key
SmartKey with remote control
given at the beginning of each segment. portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ-
ent color to help distinguish each 1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey unit. 2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
4 Œ Unlock button
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
5 Battery check lamp
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 102)
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫 the doors
앫 the tailgate
앫 the fuel filler flap
114
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting Global locking Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘 Press button ‹.
Global unlocking
왘 Press button Œ once.
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
왘 Press button Œ.
the turn signal lamps flash three times. All turn signal lamps flash once. The
All turn signal lamps flash once. The The locking knobs in the doors move locking knob in the driver’s door moves
locking knobs in the doors move up. down. The anti-theft alarm system is up. The anti-theft alarm system is
The anti-theft alarm system is armed. disarmed.
disarmed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically Selective setting Global unlocking
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press button Œ twice.
within approximately 40 seconds of un- to reprogram the SmartKey so that
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking if pressing button Œ only unlocks the
locking knobs in the doors move up.
driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.
앫 neither door nor tailgate is opened The anti-theft alarm system is
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ disarmed.
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
starter switch
until battery check lamp 5
앫 the central locking switch is not (컄 page 114) flashes twice.
activated
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
116
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
118
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO* 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be positioned farther away from the vehi-
앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
located outside the vehicle within ap- cle, the system may no longer recog-
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
(컄 page 114).
door or the tailgate. The vehicle then cannot be locked or
The starter switch is located under the the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
앫 If the vehicle has been parked for more
KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the system.
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside
KEYLESS-GO button out in order to ac-
door handle in order to activate the 앫 If you have started the engine with the
cess the starter switch (컄 page 43).
KEYLESS-GO function. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func- (컄 page 59), you can turn it off again by
앫 In order to start the engine with the
tions with normal SmartKey functions
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: 앫 pressing the KEYLESS-GO
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹ button). 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 70)
must be located in the vehicle. 앫 inserting the SmartKey into the
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
starter switch when the vehicle is at
KEYLESS-GO with you. 앫 The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
a standstill and the automatic
must be inserted in the starter
앫 Never store the SmartKey with transmission is in position P
switch (컄 page 43).
KEYLESS-GO together with: (컄 page 70)
앫 The brake pedal must be firmly
앫 electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with depressed. Do not depress the
KEYLESS-GO accelerator.
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is 앫 Remember that the engine can be Factory setting
removed from the vehicle (e.g. if a started by anyone with a SmartKey
passenger exits the vehicle with the with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the Global unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO) vehicle.
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
Possibility 1 (One SmartKey with
앫 when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one All turn signal lamps flash once. The
start/stop button or trying to lock
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside locking knobs in the doors move up.
the vehicle with the look button on
the vehicle): The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
an outside door handle the mes-
If you leave the SmartKey with armed.
sage Key not detected appears in
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and The vehicle will lock again automatically
the multifunction display
locking the vehicle, no message and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
앫 with the engine running, the mes- appears in the multifunction display. within approximately 40 seconds of
sage Key not detected appears in Possibility 2 (One SmartKey with unlocking if
the multifunction display while KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
driving off. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside 앫 neither a door nor the tailgate is
the vehicle): opened
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediate- When exiting and trying to lock the 앫 the central locking switch is not
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger vehicle, the message Key detected in activated
seat or insert it in shirt pocket). vehicle will appear in the multifunction
display. The vehicle will not be locked. i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked
if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the vehicle and
앫 an outside door handle is splashed with
water
or
앫 you attempt to clean an outside door handle
120
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler Global locking
flap
왘 Press the lock button on an outside 왘 Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 72). 왘 Grasp the driver’s outside door handle. door handle (컄 page 72).
With the tailgate and all doors closed, All turn signal lamps flash once. The All turn signal lamps flash three times.
the turn signal lamps flash three times. locking knob in the driver’s door moves The locking knobs in the doors move
The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis- down. The anti-theft alarm system is
down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. armed.
armed.
Global unlocking Restoring to factory setting
Selective setting 왘 Grasp any outside door handle other 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish than the driver’s outside door handle. simultaneously for about 5 seconds
to reprogram the SmartKey with until battery check lamp 5
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the (컄 page 117) flashes twice.
locking knobs in the doors move up.
driver’s door handle only the driver’s door
The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
armed.
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 117) flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries in the SmartKey Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with Opening the doors from the inside
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO*
You can open a locked door from the in-
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with side. Open door only when conditions are
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you safe to do so.
The battery check lamp (컄 page 114)
should do the following:
or (컄 page 117) comes on briefly to in-
dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an
order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
i If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey,
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the
Replace the batteries (컄 page 506). mechanical key immediately to your
You can obtain the required batteries at any car insurance company.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if 1 Locking knob
necessary. 2 Inside door handle
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the Truck Center will be glad to supply you
vehicle accordingly.
with a replacement.
122
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i If the vehicle has previously been locked Front doors Tailgate/Power tailgate*
from the outside with the SmartKey or
왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the
KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. respective front door to open door.
Warning! G
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: If the door was locked, locking knob 1
With the SmartKey will move up. Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Rear doors other dangers deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
SmartKey. 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-
unconsciousness and death.
tive rear door to unlock door.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫 Grasp an outside door handle. 왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re-
A minimum height clearance of
spective rear door to open door.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 7.4 ft (2.25 m) is required to open the
(컄 page 43). tailgate.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
inside the vehicle. ! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance.
123
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Tailgate Opening the tailgate from the inside 왘 Lift handle 1 in direction of arrow 3.
You can unlock the tailgate from the The tailgate is released and can be
Opening the tailgate from the outside
third-row seats and then open it manually. opened manually.
i Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The handle is located on the right of the i If you do not open the tailgate within a few
The vehicle must be unlocked (컄 page 40).
tailgate’s window trim. seconds, the tailgate lock will automatically
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: engage again. Additionally, the tailgate will
When opening the tailgate, the vehicle is globally relock automatically, if the vehicle was locked
unlocked. when the tailgate was released from the inside.
The handle is located above the rear If the tailgate lock does not engage automatically
license plate recess. and, if applicable, the tailgate does not relock
after a few seconds, you have to close the tail-
gate manually (컄 page 125).
1 Handle
2 Push
3 Lift
왘 Push handle 1 in direction of
arrow 2 and hold it there.
왘 Pull on the handle.
The tailgate opens slightly.
왘 Pull tailgate upwards to open.
124
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
125
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the tailgate from the outside Opening the tailgate from the inside The switch is located on the door control
panel.
You can unlock and open the tailgate You can unlock and open the tailgate si-
simultaneously from the outside when the multaneously from the driver’s seat when
vehicle is at a standstill. the vehicle is at a standstill.
왘 Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO* until the tailgate unlocks
and opens. Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
While the tailgate is opening, an
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or
acoustic signal sounds.
with the Š button on the SmartKey or
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the 1 Remote tailgate switch with indicator
왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: opening procedure carefully to make sure lamp
Pull on the handle (컄 page 124). no one is in danger of being injured.
왘 Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
The entire vehicle is unlocked and the tailgate begins to open.
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
tailgate opens. While the tailgate is
switch or press the Š button on the The tailgate opens. The indicator lamp
opening, an acoustic signal sounds.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. in the remote tailgate switch comes on
and remains lit until the tailgate is
closed. While the tailgate is opening, an
acoustic signal sounds.
126
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
127
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
128
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
129
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
130
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
131
Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see Easy-entry feature for third-row seats
the “Getting started” section (컄 page 45).
The lever for the easy-entry feature is lo-
For more information on seats, see “Load- cated on the rear of the seat base of the
ing” (컄 page 297). passenger side second-row seat.
132
Controls in detail
Seats
For setting the front passenger seat back 왘 To exit the vehicle when seated on a
into the stored position, see “Recalling po- third-row seat, pull up and hold
sitions from memory” (컄 page 144). easy-exit strap 1.
For information on how to fold down the The right second-row seat backrest
second-row seats completely, see “Folding folds forward.
second-row seats” (컄 page 308).
왘 Pull and hold once easy-entry strap 1.
Easy-exit feature for third-row seats 왘 Lift up the right second-row seat until it
folds forward.
The easy-exit strap is located on the right
Easy-entry/exit position rear of the second-row seat base. You should now have sufficient space
to exit the vehicle’s third-row seat.
While the easy-entry feature is activated,
you will see, for example, the following i Vehicles with memory function*:
message in the multifunction display: The front passenger seat moved slightly forward.
133
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄왘 Return seat into its original position Emergency exit for third-row seats
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
(컄 page 134).
locked, the seat could move forward and the i If, due to an accident or other situation, it is
The message in the multifunction dis- seat backrest could fold. You could slide un- not possible for you to exit the vehicle on the
play disappears. der the seat belt during braking, vehicle ma- side of the easy-entry seat (컄 page 132), you
neuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under can fold the left side of the seat backrest in the
For setting the front passenger seat back second row of seats down in order to open the
it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen
into the stored position, see “Recalling po- left rear door.
or neck. That could cause serious or even fa-
sitions from memory” (컄 page 144).
tal injuries.
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see “Folding 왘 Fold seat (컄 page 133) back until it au-
second-row seats” (컄 page 308). dibly engages.
Returning second-row seats to their 왘 Fold seat backrest (컄 page 132) back
original position into original position until it engages.
To make sure the seat backrest has en-
Warning! G gaged, lean firmly against the backrest.
134
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Pull emergency release 1 in the Front seat active head restraints Rear seats
direction of arrow.
왘 Push seat backrest 2 forwards.
Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly According to accident statistics, children
positioned head restraints. are safer when properly restrained in the
To help avoid personal injury when folding rear seating positions than in the front seat-
Adjust the head restraint so that it is close
the seat backrest forward, make sure that ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
to the head as possible and the center of the
you move both feet and legs all the way back that children be placed in the rear seats.
head restraint supports the back of the head
and out of the way to avoid them contacting Regardless of seating position, children
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
the seat as it pivots forward. 12 years old and under must be seated and
injury to the head and neck in the event of
In order to prevent an accident or any other an accident or similar situation. properly secured in an appropriately sized
potentially dangerous situations when open- infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
ing the rear door and exiting the vehicle, seat recommended for the size and weight
You cannot remove the active head of the child. For additional information, see
make sure that you are aware of the traffic restraints on the driver’s and front
situation at all times. “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 93).
passenger’s seat.
For removal of the active head restraints A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
왘 Open the left door. we recommend that you contact an significantly increased if the child restraints
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck are not properly secured in the vehicle
왘 Exit the vehicle. and/or the child is not properly secured in
Center.
the child restraint.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 45).
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 92).
135
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat adjustment The seat backrest tilt can be set to five
Check for secure locking by pushing and
different positions.
pulling on the seat backrests. If a seat and
Warning! G seat backrest are not properly locked, the The handles for adjusting the seats are
seat could move forward and the seat back- located on the rear of each seat base.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat rest could fold. The child seat would no long-
backrest in an excessively reclined position er be properly supported or positioned to
as this can be dangerous. You could slide provide its intended benefit.
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Seat backrest tilt (second-row seats)
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the Warning! G
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
The seat belt only offers its intended protec-
belts are properly positioned on the body.
tion when the seat backrest is in a nearly
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can vertical position and the occupant is sitting
1 Adjustment handle
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 54). upright. Avoid sitting in positions that pre- 왘 While seated, pull handle 1 in direc-
Never place hands under the seat or near vent the seat belt from being properly posi- tion of arrow to resistance point and
any moving parts while a seat is being tioned against the body (컄 page 54). You hold it there.
adjusted. should therefore adjust the backrest to a po-
왘 To move seat backrest back, lean light-
sition as upright as possible.
After adjusting rear seats, make sure ly against backrest.
앫 the seats are properly locked
앫 the seat backrests are in an upright po-
sition and are properly locked
136
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning! G
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from
the lowest non-use position and have the oc-
cupant adjust the head restraint properly. Second-row seat head restraint
For your protection, drive only with properly 1 Head restraint
positioned head restraints. 2 Release button
137
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning! G
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints installed when the rear seats
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from Second-row seat head restraint
The angle of the head restraint for the out- the lowest non-use position and have the oc-
cupant adjust the head restraint properly. 1 Head restraint
er second-row seats or the third-row seats 2 Release button
can be adjusted manually. For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints. Removing
왘 While seated, reach behind you with
both hands and find lower edge of the Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
왘 Second-row seat:
head restraint. it is as close to the head as possible and the
Fold the seat backrest forward
center of the head restraint supports the
왘 Adjust the head restraint to the desired (컄 page 136).
back of the head at eye level. This will re-
position by pushing or pulling on the 왘 Third-row seat:
duce the potential for injury to the head and
lower edge of the head restraint cush- Fold the seat backrest forward
neck in the event of an accident or similar
ion. (컄 page 307).
situation.
왘 Pull head restraint 1 to its uppermost
position.
138
Controls in detail
Seats
139
Controls in detail
Seats
The multicontour seat has an extendable Seat cushion depth The switches for front-seat heating are lo-
seat cushion and inflatable air chambers cated in the center console.
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
built into the backrest to provide additional
length of your upper leg with
lumbar and side support.
switch 1.
The seat cushion depth, seat backrest
cushion-height and curvature can be con- Backrest contour
tinuously varied with switches on the in-
왘 Adjust the contour of the seat backrest
side of each front seat base after the
to the desired position with
ignition is switched on (컄 page 41).
switch æ or ç.
왘 Move the backrest support to the bot-
tom with button 4 or to the center
with button 3. 1 Seat heating switch, front seats
2 Indicator lamps
Backrest side bolsters
왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 2.
140
Controls in detail
Seats
The switches for second-row seat heating* The red indicator lamps in the switch come 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
are located in the rear center console. on to show which heating level you have
selected. Switching on
왘 Press switch 1.
Level
3 Three indicator lamps on Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
(highest level) switch come on.
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
The seat heating automatically
desired seat heating level is reached.
switches to level 2 after approx-
imately 5 minutes.
Switching off
2 Two indicator lamps on
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
1 Seat heating switch*, second-row The seat heating automatically indicator lamps 2 go out.
seats switches to level 1 after approx-
2 Indicator lamps imately 10 minutes. i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on
seat heating switch 1 (컄 page 140) are flash-
1 One indicator lamp on ing, there is insufficient voltage available since
(lowest level) too many electrical consumers are switched on.
The seat heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately The seat heating will switch back on again
20 minutes. automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
off No indicator lamp on
141
Controls in detail
Seats
142
Controls in detail
Memory function*
왔 Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up Each stored position on the passenger side
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different configurations. includes the following settings:
seat position fore and aft, and seat back-
Each stored position on the driver’s side 앫 Seat position
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
includes the following settings:
control, reach and comfort. The head 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
restraint should also be adjusted for 앫 Seat position setting
proper height. See also the section on 앫 Multicontour seat*: previously saved
air bags (컄 page 76) for proper seat posi- setting
tioning.
앫 Steering wheel position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation 앫 Exterior rear view mirrors’ position
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for Warning! G
adequate rear vision.
Do not activate the memory function while
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil-
driving. Activating the memory function
dren should be seated in a properly se-
while driving could cause the driver to lose
cured restraint system that complies with
control of the vehicle.
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
143
Controls in detail
Memory function*
The memory button and stored position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
buttons are located on the entry side of
each front seat base. 왘 Adjust the seats (컄 page 45). ! Do not operate the power seats using
memory button M if the seat backrest is in an
왘 On the driver’s side, additionally adjust
excessively reclined position. Doing so could
the steering wheel (컄 page 51) and ex- cause damage to front or rear seats.
terior rear view mirrors (컄 page 52) to
Move seat backrest to an upright position first.
the desired positions.
왘 Press and hold stored position
왘 Press memory button M.
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
왘 Release memory button M and press wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
stored position 1, 2 or 3 within have fully moved to the stored posi-
3 seconds. tions.
All settings are stored to the selected i Releasing the stored position button stops
M Memory button
position. movement to the stored positions immediately.
1, 2, 3 Stored position buttons
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
or
왘 Open the respective door.
144
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch 5 C Parking lamps (also side marker
headlamps and use the turn signals, see lamps, tail lamps, license plate
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 62) lamps, instrument panel lamps)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 63).
6 B Low beam headlamps or high
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive beam headlamps when the com-
on the other side of the road than the country in bination switch is pushed for-
which the vehicle is registered, you must have ward. The tail lamps, license
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
plate lamps, side marker lamps,
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck parking lamps and instrument
Center. panel lamps also come on.
7 ‡ Front fog lamps
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* 1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
headlamps: 8 † Rear fog lamp
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps monitor the stops)
vehicles steering angle and vehicle speed, then 2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left
automatically shift their beams to either side to i If you hear a warning signal you have
one stop) forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
better follow the curvature of the road ahead,
3 M Off opening the driver’s door.
increasing usable illumination over conventional
headlamps. In addition the message Switch off lights
Daytime running lamp mode appears in the multifunction display.
(컄 page 147)
Switch off the headlamps.
4 U Automatic headlamp mode
! Failure to switch off the headlamps when
Daytime running lamp mode leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
(컄 page 147) battery.
145
Controls in detail
Lighting
146
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in USA only
position M or U, you cannot switch on the
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to By default, the daytime running lamp mode
high beam headlamps.
position M or U. is deactivated. Activate the daytime
The high beam flasher is available at all times. running lamp mode using the control
When the engine is running, the low
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
beam headlamps are switched on. switch to position B to permit activation of mode (USA only)” (컄 page 178).
In low ambient light conditions, the the high beam headlamps.
following lamps will switch on When the engine is running, and you shift
i With the exterior lamp switch in
position M, you cannot switch on the high
additionally: from a driving position to position N or P, beam headlamps.
앫 Tail and parking lamps the low beam headlamps will switch off
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
with a 3 minute delay.
앫 License plate lamps For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
When the engine is running, and you switch to position B or U to permit
앫 Side marker lamps activation of the high beam headlamps.
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
i With the daytime running lamp mode position C, the parking lamps and When the engine is running, and you turn
activated and the engine running, you cannot
the side marker lamps switch on the exterior lamp switch to position C
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
additionally or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
Canada only 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
mode.
position B, the manual headlamp
The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
mode has priority over the daytime The corresponding exterior lamps switch
tory and therefore in a constant mode.
running lamp mode on (컄 page 62).
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 62).
147
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security Fog lamps Front fog lamps
illumination
왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps
The locator lighting and the night security Warning! G (컄 page 62).
illumination are described in the “Control
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
system” section, see “Setting locator light- In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
stop.
ing” (컄 page 179) and “Setting night secu- only switch from position U to B with
rity illumination” (컄 page 179). the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. The front fog lamps switch on.
Switching from U to B will briefly The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while exterior lamp switch comes on.
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident. 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog exterior lamp switch goes out.
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
148
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Combination switch 왘 Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps
switch off the high beam.
(컄 page 62).
The high beam headlamp indicator
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
lamp A in the instrument cluster
second stop.
goes out.
The rear fog lamp switches on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the High beam flasher
exterior lamp switch comes on. 왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first direction of arrow 2.
stop.
1 High beam
The rear fog lamp switches off. 2 High beam flasher
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out. High beam
The front fog lamps remain lit. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 145).
왘 Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 26).
149
Controls in detail
Lighting
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* Driving forward i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the steer-
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im- Switching on corner-illuminating front ing angle and vehicle speed, even if you did not
prove illumination of the area in the direc- fog lamps switch on either turn signal. If the
tion into which you are turning. corner-illuminating front fog lamps came on
왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal automatically, they will also go out automatically
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will (컄 page 63), depending on whether depending on the steering angle and vehicle
operate with the engine running and with you are turning left or right. speed.
앫 the exterior lamp switch in The respective front fog lamp comes on
Switching off corner-illuminating front
position B (컄 page 145) and illuminates the area in the direc-
fog lamps
or tion into which you are turning.
The combination switch for the turn signal
앫 the exterior lamp switch in or
resets automatically after major steering
position U (컄 page 145) 왘 Turn steering wheel in desired direc- wheel movements. This will switch off the
or tion. corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
The front fog lamp on the side of your were activated by switching on the left or
앫 the daytime running lamp mode right turn signal.
activated (컄 page 147) steering direction comes on.
If the turn signal should stay on after
i With the automatic headlamp mode activat- i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps making the turn, the turn signal and the
ed: The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will temporarily come on on both sides of the vehicle
if you turn the steering wheel in one direction corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be
only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
and then again in the other direction shortly switched off by returning the combination
If you are driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) thereafter. switch to its original position.
or have the front fog lamps switched on, the
corner-illuminating function is not available. i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
150
Controls in detail
Lighting
151
Controls in detail
Lighting
152
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control Switching second-row reading lamps on Switching third-row reading lamps* on
and off and off
i An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically. The second-row reading lamps are located The switches for the third-row reading
above the side windows. lamps are located in the rear overhead
Switching front/rear interior lighting on control panel.
and off
왘 Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 to switch on the
respective interior light.
왘 Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 again to switch off the
respective interior light.
Switching front reading lamps on and off Passenger side reading lamp
왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1 1 Second-row reading lamp 1 Rear right reading lamp switch
or 5 to switch on the respective front 2 Rear left reading lamp switch
왘 Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
reading lamp. 3 Rear left reading lamp
of arrow. 4 Rear interior lamp
왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1
The reading lamp comes on. 5 Rear right reading lamp
or 5 again to switch off the respective
front reading lamp. 왘 Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
of arrow again.
The reading lamp goes out.
153
Controls in detail
Lighting
왘 Press rear reading lamp switch 1 Door entry lamps Cargo compartment lamp
or 2 to switch on the respective rear
reading lamp. For better orientation in the dark, the The cargo compartment lamp comes on
corresponding door entry lamps comes on when the tailgate is opened.
왘 Press rear reading lamp switch 1
when you open a door and the automatic
or 2 again to switch off the respective If you leave the tailgate open for an extend-
control is activated.
rear reading lamp. ed period of time, the cargo compartment
The door entry lamps will switch off when lamp will switch off automatically after ap-
i The rear interior lighting is switched on and the corresponding door is closed. proximately 5 minutes.
off using the button on the front overhead con-
trol panel (컄 page 151). i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
154
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument i Opening a front door or pressing the reset Adjusting instrument cluster illumina-
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” button without switching on the ignition or the tion
(컄 page 26). exterior lighting activates the multifunction
display illumination only for 30 seconds. Use button 1 or 3 to adjust the illumina-
For information on changing the instru- tion brightness for the instrument cluster.
ment cluster settings, e.g. the language, i The instrument cluster illumination is
see “Instrument cluster submenu” dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
(컄 page 174). bient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
Warning! G adjusted automatically when you switch on the
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
No messages will be displayed if either the i With the exterior lighting switched on, the
instrument cluster or the multifunction brightness of the switches in the center console
1 To dim instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted when using button 1 or 3.
display is inoperative.
2 Reset button
3 To brighten instrument cluster As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such
To brighten illumination
illumination
as speed or outside temperature, warn- 왘 Press and hold button 3 until the
The instrument cluster is activated when ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning desired level of illumination is reached.
you messages or the failure of any systems.
앫 open a door Driving characteristics may be impaired. To dim illumination
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 42) If you must continue to drive, do so with 왘 Press and hold button 1 until the
added caution. Contact an authorized desired level of illumination is reached.
앫 press reset button 2
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
앫 switch on the exterior lamps as possible.
(컄 page 145)
155
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Resetting trip odometer To help protect the engine, the fuel supply The temperature sensor is located in the
is interrupted if the engine is operated front bumper area. Due to its location, the
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome- within the red marking. sensor can be affected by road or engine
ter display (컄 page 157). heat during idling or slow driving. This
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è Outside temperature indicator means that the accuracy of the displayed
or ÿ on the multifunction steering temperature can only be verified by com-
wheel (컄 page 158) repeatedly until parison to a thermometer placed next to
the trip odometer appears in the multi- Warning! G the sensor, not by comparison to external
function display. displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
왘 Press and hold reset button 2 in the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
instrument cluster (컄 page 155) until ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
the trip odometer is reset. garage), you will notice a delay before the
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- lower temperature is displayed.
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
Tachometer A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
The red marking on the tachometer perature indications caused by heat
(컄 page 26) denotes excessive engine radiated from the engine during idling or
speed. The outside temperature is displayed in the slow driving.
multifunction display (컄 page 157).
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 (컄 page 42) or as
soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
ton* is in position 1 (컄 page 44). The con- conditions must always be his/her primary
trol system enables you to focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for maintenance service, to set the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
language for messages in the instrument (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
cluster display, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Transmission position indicator
ly 14 m) every second. 4 Status indicator (outside temperature
or digital speedometer)
The control system relays information to For more information on menus displayed
the multifunction display. in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 160).
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display 6 Voice Control System*1, see sepa-
Operating the control system rate operating instructions
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are 2 Telephone*: 7 Menu systems:
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- Press button Press button
tion steering wheel. è for next menu
s to take a call
to dial ÿ for previous menu
to redial
t to end a call Depending on the selected menu
to reject an incoming call (컄 page 160), pressing the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel will alter what
3 Selecting the submenu or setting
is shown in the multifunction display.
the volume:
Press button The information available in the multifunc-
tion display is arranged in menus, each
æ up/to increase
containing a number of functions or sub-
ç down/to decrease menus.
4 Voice Control System*1, see sepa- The individual functions are then found
rate operating instructions within the relevant menu (radio or
5 Moving within a menu: CD operations under Audio, for example).
Press button These functions serve to call up relevant
j for next display information or to customize the settings
for your vehicle.
k for previous display
1
Vehicles without Voice Control System*: Button
without function.
158
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- functions, you will find a number of pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. submenus for calling up and changing
settings. For instructions on using these
앫 If you press button è or ÿ
submenus, see “Settings menu”
repeatedly, you will pass through each
(컄 page 170).
menu one after the other.
The number of menus available in the sys-
앫 If you press button k or j
tem depends on which optional equipment
repeatedly, you will pass through each
is installed in your vehicle.
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 1 to 5. overview of the individual menus.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
i The headings used in the menus table are The first function displayed in each menu will
designed to facilitate navigation within the sys- automatically show you which part of the system
tem and are not necessarily identical to those you are in.
shown in the control system displays.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 6 to a. overview of the individual menus.
162
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster DSR (Downhill Speed Fuel consumption statis- Searching for name
submenu Regulation) pro- tics since the last reset in phone book
grammed default speed
Time/Date submenu Resetting fuel consump-
tion statistics
Lighting submenu Distance to empty
Vehicle submenu
Comfort submenu*
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
i The headings used in the menus table are The first function displayed in each menu will
designed to facilitate navigation within the sys- automatically show you which part of the system
tem and are not necessarily identical to those you are in.
shown in the control system displays.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature
164
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Calling up digital speedometer or i You can select whether the digital speedom-
until the coolant temperature appears outside temperature eter or the outside temperature is shown in the
in the multifunction display. multifunction display.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly You can change the setting in the submenu
until the digital speedometer or the Instr. cluster via the function Status line
outside temperature appears in the display, see “Selecting display (digital speed-
multifunction display. ometer or outside temperature) for status
indicator” (컄 page 175).
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Audio menu Selecting radio station i You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
왘 Turn on the COMAND system and
The functions in the Audio menu operate separate COMAND system operating instruc-
select radio. Refer to separate tions.
the audio equipment which you currently
COMAND system operating instruc-
have turned on. You can also operate the radio in the usual
tions.
manner.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
on, the message Audio off appears in the
until the currently tuned station Selecting satellite radio station*
multifunction display.
appears in the multifunction display. (USA only)
The following functions are available:
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
Function Page application.
Selecting radio station 166 왘 Select satellite radio with the
Selecting satellite radio station* 166 corresponding soft key on the
(USA only) COMAND system.
Operating CD player 167 1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The station search depends on the se-
lected setting in the Vehicle submenu 1 SAT mode
of the control system (컄 page 183). 2 Channel name or number
Pressing button k or j will
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
either start a frequency scan or select
until the desired channel is found.
the next stored radio station.
166
Controls in detail
Control system
167
Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu 앫 With the COMAND system switched on Vehicles with air suspension:
and route guidance activated, the di-
The Nav menu contains the functions rection of travel and maneuver instruc-
needed to operate your navigation system. tions appear in the multifunction
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly display.
until the message Nav appears in the Please refer to the COMAND system
multifunction display. manual for instructions on how to activate
The message shown in the multifunction the route guidance system. Vehicles with air suspension and
display depends on the status of the navi- differential locks*:
gation system: Off-road menu
앫 With the COMAND system switched The Off-road menu displays the messages
off, the message Nav off appears in for air suspension, differential locks* and
the multifunction display. the direction into which you are currently
앫 With the COMAND system switched on driving.
but route guidance not activated, the 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
direction of travel and, if applicable, the until one of the following messages ap- until the desired setting is found.
name of the street currently traveled pears in the multifunction display.
on appear in the multifunction display. For information on air suspension, see “Air
suspension package” (컄 page 280).
For information on differential locks*, see
“Differential locks*” (컄 page 206).
For information on the compass, see
“Vehicle submenu” (컄 page 181) and
“Compass” (컄 page 345).
168
Controls in detail
Control system
169
Controls in detail
Control system
If conditions have occurred causing status Should the vehicle’s system record any Settings menu
messages to be recorded, the number of conditions while driving, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two
display: tion display functions:
앫 when the SmartKey in the starter 앫 The function Reset to factory
switch is turned to position 0 or settings?, with which you can reset all
removed from the starter switch. the settings to the original factory
settings.
or
앫 A collection of submenus with which
앫 when you turn off the engine by
you can make individual settings for
왘 Press button k or j. pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
your vehicle.
button (컄 page 70) in the starter
The stored messages will now be switch once and open the driver’s door 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
displayed in the order in which they (this puts the starter switch in until the Settings menu appears in the
have occurred. For malfunctions and position 0, same as with the SmartKey multifunction display.
warning messages, see “Vehicle status removed from the starter switch)
messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 451). i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-
i After you have scrolled through all recorded er switch to position 1 or 2, or when you press
status messages, the first recorded message the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
appears again. twice without depressing the brake pedal. You
will then only see high priority messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 451).
170
Controls in detail
Control system
The following settings and submenus are Resetting all settings i The settings you have changed will not be
available in the Settings menu: reset unless you confirm the action by pressing
You can reset the functions of all
the reset button a second time.
submenus to the factory settings.
Function Page After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
왘 Press the reset button in the instru- menu reappears in the multifunction display
Resetting all settings 171
ment cluster (컄 page 155) for (컄 page 170).
Submenus in the settings menu 172 approximately 3 seconds.
Instrument cluster submenu 174
i For safety reasons, the function
The request to press the reset button Lamp circuit headlamp in the Lighting
Time/date submenu 176 once more to confirm appears in the submenu cannot be reset while driving.
Lighting submenu 178 multifunction display. The following message appears in the multifunc-
tion display:
Vehicle submenu 181 Settings
Comfort submenu* 184 Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
while driving
171
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use the j button to access
왘 Press button j.
the individual functions within that sub-
The collection of the submenus menu. Once within that submenu, you can
appears in the multifunction display. use the j button to move to the next
function or the k button to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
왘 Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with the button æ.
172
Controls in detail
Control system
173
Controls in detail
Control system
174
Controls in detail
Control system
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu Setting the time (hours) Setting the time (minutes)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date is equipped with the COMAND system and is equipped with the COMAND system and
submenu to change the time and date navigation module*. navigation module*.
settings.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
The following functions are available: button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu.
Function Page
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Setting the time (hours) 176 until the message Clock Set hour until the message Clock Set
Setting the time (minutes) 176 appears in the multifunction display. minute(s) appears in the multifunction
display.
Setting the date (month) 177 The selection marker is on the hour
setting. The selection marker is on the minute
Setting the date (day) 177
setting.
Setting the date (year) 177
176
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (month) Setting the date (day) Setting the date (year)
This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and is equipped with the COMAND system and is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*. navigation module*. navigation module*.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu. submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Date Set month until the message Date Set day until the message Date Set year
appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month The selection marker is on the day The selection marker is on the year
setting. setting. setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
month. day. year.
177
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu 왘 Move the selection marker with In low ambient light conditions the
button æ or ç to the Lighting following lamps will switch on additionally:
Access the Lighting submenu via the
submenu.
Settings menu. Use the Lighting 앫 Parking lamps
submenu to change the lamp and lighting 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 Tail lamps
settings on your vehicle. until the message Lamp circuit
headlamp appears in the multifunction 앫 License plate lamps
The following functions are available:
display. 앫 Side marker lamps
Function Page The selection marker is on the current For more information on the daytime
Setting daytime running lamp 178 setting. running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
mode (USA only) (컄 page 145).
Setting locator lighting 179 i For safety reasons, changing the setting for
Setting night security illumination 179 the daytime running lamp mode is not possible
while the vehicle is in motion. The following
Setting interior lighting delayed 180 message appears in the multifunction display:
shut-off Settings
왘 Press button æ or ç to select only possible
Setting daytime running lamp mode manual operation (Manual) or daytime at standstill
(USA only) running lamp mode (Constant). For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings
(컄 page 171) while driving will not deactivate the
i This function is not available in countries With daytime running lamp mode activated
daytime running lamp mode.
where the daytime running lamp mode is and the exterior lamp switch at
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting 왘 Move the selection marker with Setting night security illumination
button æ or ç to the Lighting (Headlamps delayed shut-off)
With the locator lighting feature activated,
submenu.
the exterior lamp switch in position U Use this function to set whether you would
(컄 page 145) and the interior lighting in au- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly like the exterior lamps to remain on for
tomatic mode (컄 page 152), the following until the message Function Surround 15 seconds during darkness after exiting
lamps will switch on during darkness when lighting appears in the multifunction the vehicle and closing all doors.
the vehicle is unlocked using button Œ display.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off
on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
The selection marker is on the current feature activated and the exterior lamp
KEYLESS-GO:
setting. switch in position U before the engine
앫 Parking lamps is turned off, the following lamps will
앫 Tail lamps switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫 Parking lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Front fog lamps*
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch 앫 Side marker lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the the locator lighting function On or Off.
driver’s door is opened. 앫 Front fog lamps*
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
If you do not open a door after unlocking position U when exiting the vehicle. If after turning off the engine you do not
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps open a door or do not close an opened
will switch off automatically after The locator lighting feature is door, the lamps will automatically switch
approximately 40 seconds. activated. off after 60 seconds.
179
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
button æ or ç to the Lighting position U before turning off the
Use this function to set whether you would
submenu. engine.
like the interior lighting to remain on for
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly The headlamps delayed shut-off 10 seconds during darkness after you have
until the message Headlamp delayed feature is activated. removed the SmartKey from the starter
shut-off appears in the multifunction switch.
You can temporarily deactivate the
display.
headlamps delayed shut-off feature: 왘 Move the selection marker with
The selection marker is on the current 왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the button æ or ç to the Lighting
setting. SmartKey in the starter switch to submenu.
position 0. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Int. light.
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
delayed shut-off appears in the
to 0.
multifunction display.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
The selection marker is on the current
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature the starter switch.
On or Off. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
in the starter switch (컄 page 43).
180
Controls in detail
Control system
181
Controls in detail
Control system
182
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of Audio search function Setting automatic locking
between 3 mph and 6 mph (5 km/h
Use of the Audio search function to select Use this function to activate or deactivate
and 10 km/h).
a radio station will enable you to start a the automatic central locking. With the
When calibration was successful, the frequency scan (Freq.) (컄 page 166) or automatic central locking system
following message appears in the mul- select a radio station stored in memory activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
tifunction display: (Memory). vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
Compass calibration (15 km/h).
왘 Move the selection marker with
Completed successfully
button æ or ç to the Vehicle 왘 Move the selection marker with
i If the message Compass calibration submenu. button æ or ç to the Vehicle
Completed successfully does not appear in
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly submenu.
the multifunction display, drive another full
until the message Audio Search 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
circle.
function appears in the multifunction until the message Automatic door
If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes,
display. lock appears in the multifunction
the message Compass Calibration appears
in the multifunction display again. Calibrating the display.
The selection marker is on the current
compass has failed due to outside influences. setting. The selection marker is on the current
Repeat compass calibration in a different setting.
location.
183
Controls in detail
Control system
184
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with Setting fold-in function* for exterior
button æ or ç to the Comfort rear view mirrors
submenu.
Using this function, you can set the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly exterior rear view mirrors to be automati-
until the message Easy-entry feature cally folded in when you lock your vehicle.
appears in the multifunction display.
i With this function set to On and the exterior 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
The selection marker is on the current rear view mirrors folded in using the button on
setting. the door control panel (컄 page 211), the exterior function On or Off.
rear view mirrors will not fold out when you
switch on the ignition. You will then have to fold Vehicle configuration
out the exterior rear view mirrors using the
button on the door control panel (컄 page 211). The following functions are available:
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off. Function Page
Distance warning function* 186
왘 Move the selection marker with
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch on/off
button æ or ç to the Comfort
the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off. DSR set speed 186
submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Fold in mirrors
when locking appears in the multi-
function display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
185
Controls in detail
Control system
186
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button æ or ç repeatedly Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics since start
until the desired speed is shown in the
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
multifunction display. Use the trip computer menu to call up
until the message From start appears
statistical data on your vehicle.
When DSR is switched on, DSR will use in the multifunction display.
the programmed default speed to regu- The following information is available:
late the vehicle’s speed.
Function Page
i Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the
set speed using the cruise control lever Fuel consumption statistics 187
(컄 page 278). since start
Fuel consumption statistics 188
since the last reset 1 Distance driven since start
Resetting fuel consumption sta- 188 2 Time elapsed since start
tistics 3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
Distance to empty 188
i All statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
i When you enter the trip computer menu, you the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
will always see the fuel consumption statistics
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
since start first.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
187
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since the Resetting fuel consumption statistics Distance to empty
last reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message From start appears until the message From start appears
until the message From start appears in the multifunction display. in the multifunction display.
in the multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message After reset appears until the message Range: appears in
until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display. the multifunction display.
in the multifunction display. 왘 Press and hold the reset button in the The calculated remaining driving range
instrument cluster (컄 page 155) until based on the current fuel tank level
the value is reset to 0. appears in the multifunction display.
i The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-
matically to 0 when either of the following values
is exceeded:
앫 distance covered: 100000 miles
1 Distance driven since last reset
앫 time elapsed: 10000 hours
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
188
Controls in detail
Control system
189
Controls in detail
Control system
190
Controls in detail
Control system
191
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
192
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
193
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
194
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shifting from D or R to N Shifting procedure With drive position D selected, you can use
the steering wheel gearshift control
If you want to select neutral position N
The automatic transmission selects indi- buttons (컄 page 201) to influence trans-
with the transmission being in drive
vidual gears automatically, depending on: mission shifting by:
position D or reverse gear R:
앫 drive position D (컄 page 195) with gear 앫 limiting the gear range
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
ranges (컄 page 200)
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. 앫 changing gears manually
앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal
(컄 page 198) Transmission positions
(컄 page 68).
앫 the vehicle speed
i When the vehicle needs to be moved with The current transmission position appears
the engine switched off and the transmission set ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. in the multifunction display.
to neutral position N (컄 page 195), do not Do not place full load on the engine until the
depress the parking brake pedal. operating temperature has been reached.
왘 Move gear selector lever up to resis- Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
tance point when in drive position D or when the vehicle is stopped.
down to resistance point when in Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
reverse gear R to select neutral period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
position N.
drivetrain which is not covered by the 1 Current transmission position
왘 Release the brake pedal. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired position
by carefully driving off with the transmission in
drive position D.
Do not limit the gear range.
195
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
196
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
If you want the gear position to remain in Vehicles with SmartKey: 왘 Switch on the ignition.
neutral position N, e.g. when taking the
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill and the 왘 Depress the brake pedal.
vehicle through an automatic conveyor
ignition switched on shift the automatic
type car wash, observe the following 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
transmission to neutral position N.
instructions. neutral position N.
왘 If engaged, release the parking brake 왘 Release the brake pedal.
(컄 page 60).
Warning! G 왘 If engaged, release the parking brake
왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
(컄 page 60).
When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey SmartKey in the starter switch.
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
not leave children unattended in the vehicle. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the
It is possible for children to switch on the 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress starter switch.
ignition which could result in unsupervised the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
use of vehicle equipment. 왘 With the ignition switched on shift the reason in neutral position N can result in
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle automatic transmission to park transmission damage that is not covered by the
could result in an accident and/or serious position P. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
personal injury.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button from the starter switch
(컄 page 43).
왘 Insert the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.
197
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Kickdown
Warning! G Warning! G Use kickdown when you want maximum
Getting out of your vehicle without shifting When leaving the vehicle, always remove the acceleration.
into park position P is dangerous. Also, park SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
position P alone is not intended to or capa- from the starter switch, take it with you, and resistance.
ble of preventing your vehicle from moving, lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
Depending on the engine speed the
possibly hitting people or objects. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
Always set the parking brake in addition to unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the
automatic transmission out of park 왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
shifting to position P (컄 page 68).
position P, which could result in an accident reached the desired speed.
When parked on an incline, turn the front and/or serious personal injury.
wheels towards the road curb. The transmission shifts up again.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- Driving tips Stopping
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
exhaust system, as these materials could be Accelerator position 왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Your driving style influences the 왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake.
transmission’s shifting behavior:
When you stop for a longer period of time
Less throttle Earlier upshifting with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
More throttle Later upshifting 왘 Set the parking brake.
왘 Shift into park position P.
198
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
199
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
200
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
201
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
202
Controls in detail
Transfer case
왔 Transfer case
! Operational or performance test must only LOW RANGE mode* Gear Ranges
be conducted on a two-axle dynanometer. If
There are two possible settings.
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized The LOW RANGE mode is available on vehi-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could cles with enhanced off-road package*.
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or HIGH Road position for all normal
the transfer case which is not covered by the In the following situations you should RANGE driving situations.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. switch to LOW RANGE mode:
(LOW RANGE mode off)
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, 앫 during off-road driving (컄 page 357) LOW Off-road position for traveling
the engine and ignition must be shut off 앫 when crossing water (컄 page 362) RANGE on rough terrain.
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in 앫 when towing up or down on steep (LOW RANGE mode on)
position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake gradients Also use the off-road position
on a brake test dynamometer and such testing
should be no longer than 10 seconds. With the LOW RANGE selected, the when driving on-road on steep
engine’s power delivery and the shifting gradients, especially when
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system behavior of the automatic transmission are towing a trailer.
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz adjusted. Furthermore, the ABS, ESP® and LOW RANGE acts by raising
Limited Warranty. 4-ETS functions especially adapted to the engine’s gear ratio. The ve-
off-road travel are activated. hicle travels at roughly third
i The vehicle is equipped with full-time
four-wheel drive. Both the front and rear axles For information on driving safety systems the speed compared to when
are powered at all times when the vehicle is during LOW RANGE mode, see “Driving in the HIGH RANGE position,
being operated. safety systems” (컄 page 103). leading to an increase in the
engine’s drive power.
For more information on Off-road driving,
see “Off-road driving” (컄 page 357).
203
Controls in detail
Transfer case
204
Controls in detail
Transfer case
i You can cancel the procedure by pressing 왘 Press LOW RANGE switch 1
the LOW RANGE switch again while the indicator (컄 page 204).
lamp is flashing.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes.
Switching LOW RANGE mode off If the system senses that all conditions
(switching from LOW RANGE to HIGH are met, it will switch to back to
RANGE) HIGH RANGE mode. A chime sounds
and the LOW RANGE display 3 ap-
! The shift procedure can only be performed pears in the multifunction display.
when the following conditions are met:
앫 The engine is running (컄 page 41). The indicator lamp 2 on the
LOW RANGE switch goes out, indicat-
앫 The automatic transmission is in position N
(컄 page 193).
ing that the LOW RANGE mode has
been deactivated.
앫 The vehicle speed does not exceed 43 mph
(70 km/h). i You can cancel the procedure by pressing
the LOW RANGE switch again while the indicator
i There is no reset to LOW after the ignition lamp is flashing.
has been switched off.
For messages in the multifunction display,
see “Practical hints” section (컄 page 493).
205
Controls in detail
Differential locks*
For more information on Off-road driving, A few words about differentials and The Electronic Traction System (ETS) ad-
see “Off-road driving” (컄 page 357). differential locks* dresses this problem and provides for
good control and steering ability by auto-
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package*
When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels matically slowing the slipping wheel and
are equipped with automatic locks for the
on the outside of the curve must travel far- thus increasing the power to the other
center and rear axle differential to improve
ther and rotate faster than the inside non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle
vehicle traction.
wheels. The differential, the operation of a moving. The ESP® and ETS in this vehicle
앫 The center differential compensates set of gears that allows the powered feature such intelligent limited-slip differ-
for differences in wheel rotation be- wheels in a vehicle to turn at different ential technology, ideally suited for
tween the front and rear axle. speeds, makes this essential function pos- on-road and light off-road driving. Transfer
앫 The rear axle differential compensates sible. case position LOW (컄 page 203) also en-
differences between the rear wheels. The drawback is that the differential also hances off-road driving capabilities
sends most of the engine’s power to the (컄 page 357).
i At the front axles, the 4-ETS system wheel with the least load or strain on it. For
(컄 page 109) compensates for any traction More extreme off-road conditions may call
problems. example, if one of a vehicle’s powered for another solution, engaging a differen-
wheels sits on a patch of snow and spins tial lock or preventing the differential from
because there is no traction, all of the en- operating altogether. This vehicle comes
gine’s power will go to that wheel because with two differential locks: transfer case
the power will take the path of least resis- (center) and rear. Each can be engaged
tance. Meanwhile, the opposite wheel, sit- simply by operating a rotary switch located
ting on dry pavement where it could get on the center console (컄 page 207). When
enough grip to start the vehicle moving, the transfer case (center) differential is
sits idle because it receives no power. locked, the combined (or average) speed
of the front wheels is identical to the com-
bined rear wheel speed. When the rear
differential is locked, both rear wheels turn
206
Controls in detail
Differential locks*
at the same speed, independent of the in- Switching differential locks* The rotary switch for the differential locks
dividual torque. Please be aware that en- is located on the upper part of the center
gaging the differential locks will ! If the differential locks are engaged, accel- console.
significantly reduce the steering ability of erate gently when setting the vehicle in motion.
You can select between three locking
the vehicle. To avoid damage to the transmission, the vehicle modes.
may only be operated on a dynamometer (single
For your safety and the safety of others
axle dynamometer) if
and to prevent damage to the vehicle, the
앫 the axle not being driven is jacked up
differential locks must not be engaged
when driving on paved roads. It is impor- or
tant to understand that during 앫 the associated propeller shaft is disconnect-
on-road/paved driving, differentials are ed.
absolutely necessary for providing the es-
sential control and steering ability of the
vehicle. The differential locks, therefore,
must not be engaged when driving on
paved roads and should only be used to 1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring with
the extent necessary to negotiate off-road indicator lamp
conditions which cannot be handled by the 2 AUTO mode: center differential is auto-
systems (automatic 4-ETS, the ESP®, man- matically locked
ual switch position “LOW” of transfer case) 3 Center differential is completely locked
this vehicle comes equipped with. 4 Center and rear axle differential are
completely locked
207
Controls in detail
Differential locks*
AUTO mode Center and rear axle differential locks The differential locks should only be
engaged manually if traction is insufficient
The AUTO mode is adequate for most driv-
ing situations since the center differential Warning! G in AUTO mode.
is locked and released as required. The differential locks can be engaged in
Never drive on a paved surface with the the sequence 3, 4 (컄 page 207) up to a
i At speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h), it is center and rear axle differential locks speed of 19 mph (30 km/h).
possible to manually lock the differential locks
for driving on rough terrain. manually engaged. Ability to steer the
Engaging differential locks:
vehicle is greatly reduced when the differen-
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 42). tial locks are manually engaged, increasing 앫 for off-road driving
The center differential locks is in AUTO the risk of an accident. 앫 for driving through water
mode. The indicator lamp on the For safety reasons, the locks are automati-
앫 when driving on deep snow and icy or
adjustment ring 1 above cally released at a vehicle speed above
fouled surfaces
symbol U 2 is on. 31 mph (50 km/h). Nevertheless, you
should only manually lock the differential if
absolutely necessary because engaged
locks will restrict the vehicle drive train
while cornering and cause the vehicle to
chatter. This could cause you to lose control
of the vehicle and cause an accident.
208
Controls in detail
Differential locks*
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 42). ! If the differential locks have been manually
engaged, the tires will scuff on the road surface
왘 To select the required locking mode,
when cornering because the differences be-
rotate adjustment ring 2 to the tween the individual wheel rotation speeds will
desired position 3 or 4 not be compensated for.
(컄 page 207).
i The differential locks are reset to AUTO
The indicator lamp on the adjustment mode after the ignition has been switched off for
ring 1 at the respective symbol longer than 10 seconds.
comes on.
Example
5 Center differential is completely locked
209
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42). Rear view mirrors
“Windshield wipers” (컄 page 63).
왘 Press button 1.
For more information on setting the rear
Headlamp cleaning system* The headlamps are cleaned with a view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 52).
high-pressure water jet.
The headlamp cleaning button is located Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
on the left side of the dashboard.
i The headlamps will automatically be position
cleaned when you have
앫 switched on the headlamps
and
앫 operated the windshield wipers with wind-
shield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning
1 Headlamp cleaning button system*” (컄 page 384). 1 Lever
왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
by moving lever 1 towards the wind-
shield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
210
Controls in detail
Good visibility
211
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Synchronizing exterior rear view Folding the exterior rear view mirrors Folding in
mirrors in and out manually
왘 Briefly press button 1.
The power folding rear view mirrors may i The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
have to be synchronized after the vehicle they are not folded out completely.
battery has been disconnected or dis-
The button is located on the door control
i If you are driving at more than approximately
charged. If the exterior rear view mirrors 30 mph (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold
panel. the exterior mirrors in.
do not fold properly upon locking or un-
locking the vehicle although the corre-
sponding function in the control system is Folding out
activated (컄 page 185), do the following: 왘 Briefly press button 1 again.
왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror in Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
completely (컄 page 212).
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror out forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or
completely (컄 page 212). forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front)
press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exte- 1 Button for folding exterior rear view mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjust-
rior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise mirrors in and out ment mechanism.
repeat the above steps. The mirror housing is then properly positioned
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
Please make sure both rear view mirrors are
folded out before driving off.
212
Controls in detail
Good visibility
213
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Opening
왘 Press on button 4 to disengage the
third-row sunshade from mounting 1.
214
Controls in detail
Good visibility
215
Controls in detail
Climate control
216
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
2 Left side air vent, adjustable middle position.
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side and door air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable
a Front passenger door air vent, fixed
b Climate control panel
217
Controls in detail
Climate control
218
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en- may require replacement of the filter before its
the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. the air volume to the interior.
cools or heats the interior depending on If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
The air conditioning will not engage (no
the selected interior temperature and the before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated ture” (컄 page 251). The climate control will then
current outside temperature.
(컄 page 226). adjust the interior temperature to the set value
much faster.
Warning! G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris.
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
that enters the passenger compartment
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
through the air vents can be very hot or very
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
cold (depending on the set temperature).
impairing visibility and endangering you and
This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro-
others.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
controls (컄 page 218) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
219
Controls in detail
Climate control
220
Controls in detail
Climate control
221
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air volume Closing the center air vents Air vents in the roof liner over the
second-row seats*
왘 Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7
Five blower speeds are available.
(컄 page 216) to the left.
왘 Press button to decrease or
The corresponding center air vents on
button Q to increase air volume
the left and right are closed.
(컄 page 218) to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U Opening the side air vents
(컄 page 218) goes out. The automatic
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
operation of air volume switches off.
(컄 page 216) to the right.
The selected blower speed is shown in
the air volume display b The corresponding side air vents on the
(컄 page 218). left and right are open.
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control
Adjusting air volume for the center and Closing the side air vents 2 Air vent, adjustable
side air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
Adjusting air volume
(컄 page 216) to the left.
Opening the center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheel 1 down to decrease
The corresponding side air vents on the
왘 Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7 the air volume.
left and right are closed.
(컄 page 216) to the right. or
The corresponding center air vents on 왘 Turn thumbwheel 1 up to increase the
the left and right are open. air volume.
222
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution The climate control switches to the follow- The air volume decreases/increases to
ing functions automatically: the next lower/higher blower speed
왘 Move air vent slider 2 to the left, right,
and heating switches to the tempera-
up, or down to direct the air in the de- 앫 most efficient blower speed and
ture that was set before the front de-
sired direction. heating power, depending on outside
froster was switched on.
temperature
Front defroster The indicator lamp on button 0 or,
앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
depending on vehicle production date,
door windows (side air vents must be
You can use this setting to defrost the button | goes out. The indicator
open)
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You lamp on button 9 comes on.
can also use it to defog the windshield and 앫 the air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures or
door windows.
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for 왘 Turn temperature control 1
i Keep this setting selected only until the air-drying and/or 7 (컄 page 218) slightly in any
windshield or the door windows are clear again.
direction.
Adjustments
Activating Heating switches to the temperature
You can adjust the air volume and the tem- that was set before the front defroster
왘 Press button 0 or, depending on
perature when the front defroster is was switched on.
vehicle production date, button |
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
(컄 page 218). The indicator lamp on button 0 or,
windshield and door windows.
depending on vehicle production date,
The indicator lamp on the button
왘 Press button to decrease or button | goes out. The indicator
comes on.
button Q to increase air volume lamp on button 9 comes on. 컄컄
(컄 page 218) to the desired level.
223
Controls in detail
Climate control
컄컄i The air conditioning compressor remains on Windshield fogged on the outside If the automatic air distribution is switched
even if the indicator lamp in button 0 or, de- off:
pending on vehicle production date, button | i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again. 왘 Press air distribution button 9 or a
goes out. This helps to prevent the windshield
from fogging. (컄 page 218).
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 64).
Deactivating Air recirculation mode
왘 Press button 0 or, depending on
왘 Press button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button | Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
vehicle production date, button | (컄 page 218). unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
(컄 page 218) once more. from the outside (e.g. before driving
The indicator lamp on the button
The indicator lamp on the button goes comes on. through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
out. Defrosting is turned off. intake of outside air and recirculates the
The climate control switches automatically air in the passenger compartment.
The previous settings are in effect to the following functions:
again. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on. 앫 most efficient blower speed and Warning! G
heating power, depending on outside
i To switch off, you can also press temperature Fogged windows impair visibility,
button ´ or U (컄 page 218). endangering you and others. If the windows
앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
door windows (side air vents must be begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
open) air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior win-
앫 the air conditioning compressor dow fogging persists, make sure the air
switches on at outside temperatures conditioning (컄 page 218) is activated, or
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for press button 0 or, depending on vehicle
air-drying production date, button |.
224
Controls in detail
Climate control
225
Controls in detail
Climate control
226
Controls in detail
Climate control
227
Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear climate control* 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable Deactivating rear climate control
228
Controls in detail
Climate control
229
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
230
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
2 Left side air vent, adjustable middle position.
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side and door air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable
a Front passenger door air vent, fixed
b Automatic climate control panel
231
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
232
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
The automatic climate control is a 3-zone With the help of a sun sensor, the automat-
Warning! G intelligent automatic climate control sys- ic climate control determines the relation
tem. Your vehicle interior is divided into of the sun to the vehicle and automatically
When operating the automatic climate con- 3 zones. adjusts the inside temperature for every
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- individual zone.
partment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set tem- The automatic climate control is operation-
perature). This may cause burns or frostbite al whenever the engine is running. It cools
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the vehicle’s interior according to the an-
the air vents. gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out-
side temperature and the selected
Always keep sufficient distance between un- temperature. You can operate the auto-
protected parts of the body and the air matic climate control in either the auto-
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution matic or manual mode.
controls (컄 page 232) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
the immediate area of unprotected skin. odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 232).
233
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
234
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Operating the automatic climate 왘 Use temperature controls 1 and 9 Setting the temperature
control system in automatic mode (컄 page 232) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the Use temperature control 1 and 9
You can switch the automatic climate con- passenger compartment. (컄 page 232) to separately adjust the air
trol system on and off separately for each temperature on each side of the passenger
The temperature of the interior is ad-
zone as needed. compartment. You should raise or lower
justed automatically.
the temperature setting in small incre-
i When operating the automatic climate ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
control system in automatic mode, you will only Deactivating
rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume The automatic climate control will adjust to
and air distribution. 왘 Press one button of the air distribution the set temperature as fast as possible.
(컄 page 232) or press button
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if or Q (컄 page 232). Increasing
necessary. The indicator lamp on button U 왘 Turn temperature control 1
goes out. and/or 9 slightly clockwise.
Activating
Depending on which button you press – The automatic climate control system
왘 Press button U (컄 page 232) while the air distribution button or the air vol- will correspondingly adjust the interior
the engine is running. ume button or Q – automatic air temperature.
The indicator lamp on the button control of either the air distribution or
comes on. Air volume and air distribu- air volume is switched off. Decreasing
tion are controlled separately for each 왘 Turn the temperature control 1
zone. and/or 9 slightly counterclockwise.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
235
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Adjusting air distribution 왘 Press the desired air distribution but- Opening the side air vents
ton (컄 page 232).
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
Use the air distribution controls 3, h,
The indicator lamp on the desired but- (컄 page 230) to the right.
or j for the driver’s side, or 7, b, or c
ton goes out.
(컄 page 232) for the passenger side to The corresponding side air vents on the
separately adjust the air distribution on left and right are open.
Adjusting the air distribution for the
each side of the passenger compartment.
center and side air vents
Closing the side air vents
The following symbols are found on the
buttons: Opening the center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
(컄 page 230) to the left.
왘 Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7
Symbol Function
(컄 page 230) to the right. The corresponding side air vents on the
Driver’s Passen- left and right are closed.
side ger side The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are open.
6 Z Directs air to the
windshield and side Closing the center air vents
air vents
왘 Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7
7 a Directs air through
(컄 page 230) to the left.
the center, side and
rear passenger The corresponding center air vents on
compartment air the left and right are closed.
vents
8 Y Directs air to the
footwells and side
air vents
236
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Adjusting air volume Front defroster The automatic climate control switches to
the following functions automatically:
Five blower speeds are available. You can use this setting to defrost the
앫 most efficient blower speed and
windshield, such as when it is iced up. You
왘 Press button to decrease or heating power, depending on outside
can also use it to defog the windshield and
button Q to increase air volume temperature
door windows.
(컄 page 232) to the desired level.
앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
The indicator lamp on button U i Keep this setting selected only until the door windows (side air vents must be
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
goes out. open)
The automatic mode is switched off. Activating 앫 the air conditioning compressor
The selected blower speed appears in switches on at outside temperatures
왘 Press button 0 or, depending on
the display e (컄 page 232). above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
vehicle production date, button |
air-drying
(컄 page 232).
The indicator lamp on the button Adjustments
comes on.
You can adjust the air volume and the tem-
perature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and door windows.
237
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
왘 Press button to decrease or i The air conditioning compressor remains on Windshield fogged on the outside
button Q to increase air volume even if the indicator lamp in button 0 or, de-
(컄 page 232) to the desired level. pending on vehicle production date, button | i Keep this setting selected only until the
goes out. This helps to prevent the windshield windshield is clear again.
The air volume decreases/increases to from fogging. 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
the next lower/higher blower speed
(컄 page 64).
and heating switches to the tempera- Deactivating
ture that was set before the front de- 왘 Press button U (컄 page 232).
왘 Press button 0 or, depending on
froster was switched on. The indicator lamp on button U
vehicle production date, button |
The indicator lamp on button 0 or, (컄 page 232). goes out. Air volume and air
depending on vehicle production date, distribution are controlled separately
button | goes out. The indicator The indicator lamp on the button goes for each zone.
lamp on button 9 comes on. out. Defrosting is turned off.
If the automatic air distribution and
or The previous settings are once again in air volume are switched off:
effect.
왘 Turn temperature control 1 왘 Press buttons 8 and Y
and/or 7 (컄 page 232) slightly in any i To switch off, you can also press (컄 page 232).
direction. button ´ or U (컄 page 232).
238
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
239
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
240
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
241
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on Activating Residual heat and ventilation
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
왘 Adjust the temperature, air volume and
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned With the engine switched off, it is possible
off. air distribution (컄 page 232).
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest 왘 Press button ; (컄 page 232). for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The indicator lamp on the button use of the residual heat produced by the
comes on. engine.
Using driver-side settings for all tem-
perature zones The driver-side settings are used for all i How long the system will provide heating
temperature zones. depends on
You can use the settings of the driver’s 앫 the coolant temperature
side, such as temperature, air volume and Deactivating 앫 the battery voltage
air distribution, for all temperature zones. 왘 Press button ; (컄 page 232) again. Regardless of the temperature and air volume
These settings only need to be made once set on the automatic climate control panel, an
and the automatic climate control system The indicator lamp on the button goes interior temperature is aimed at by 72°F (22°C)
will automatically regulate the settings for out. and the blower runs on low speed to protect the
all temperature zones quickly and comfort- vehicle battery.
i If you manually set the temperature, air vol-
ably. ume or air distribution for the passenger side or
the rear passenger compartment when the
MONO setting is active, the MONO setting will
be switched off.
242
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Activating Rear automatic climate control 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 41). 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
The control panel is located at the rear of
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 232). the front center console. 3 Temperature control
The indicator lamp on the button 4 Air distribution and air volume
comes on. (automatic, manual)
5 Air distribution (directs air through
Deactivating
the center air vents)
왘 Press button 9. 6 Air distribution (directs air through
The indicator lamp on the button goes the footwells and side air vents)
out. 7 Rear automatic climate control
i The residual heat is automatically turned off: on/off
앫 when the ignition is switched on 8 Decreasing air volume
앫 after about 30 minutes 9 Indicator lamps for air volume
앫 if the coolant temperature is too low settings
앫 if the battery voltage drops a Increasing air volume
243
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
244
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
왘 Set the desired temperature for the Symbol Function Setting the temperature
rear passenger compartment using
Z Directs air to the center air Use temperature control 3 (컄 page 243)
temperature control 3 (컄 page 243).
vents to separately adjust the air temperature of
After approximately 3 seconds after Y Directs air to the footwells and the rear passenger compartment.
the last adjustment, the display switch- the side air vents You should raise or lower the temperature
es back to its standard display and the
setting in small increments, preferably
indicator lamp on button > goes
Adjusting manually starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic cli-
out.
왘 Press the desired air distribution con- mate control will adjust to the set temper-
i You can also press the > button once trol. ature as fast as possible.
more to switch back to the standard display.
The indicator lamp on button U i The rear automatic climate control will not
goes out. cool the air when the air conditioning is switched
off (컄 page 241).
245
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Increasing the temperature Adjusting air volume Air vents in the roof liner over the
second-row seats*
왘 Turn temperature control 3
Adjusting manually
(컄 page 243) slightly clockwise.
Five blower speeds are available.
The rear automatic climate control will
correspondingly adjust the interior air 왘 Press button to decrease or
temperature for the rear passenger button Q to increase air volume to
compartment. the desired level.
The indicator lamp on the button U
Decreasing the temperature goes out. The selected blower speed is
왘 Turn temperature control 3 shown by the indicator lamps for air
(컄 page 243) slightly counterclock- volume settings 9 (컄 page 243).
wise. 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control
Adjusting automatically 2 Air vent, adjustable
The rear automatic climate control will
correspondingly adjust the interior air 왘 Press button U.
Adjusting air volume
temperature for the rear passenger
The indicator lamp on the button
compartment. 왘 Turn thumbwheel 1 down to decrease
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
the air volume.
automatically.
or
왘 Turn thumbwheel 1 up to increase the
air volume.
246
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
247
Controls in detail
Power windows
248
Controls in detail
Power windows
i You can also open or close the windows Opening the door windows
If a door window encounters an obstruction
using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-
that blocks its path in a circumstance where 왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
ture” (컄 page 251) and see “Convenience clos-
you are closing a door window by pulling and ing feature” (컄 page 252). (컄 page 248) to the resistance point.
holding the switch, or by pressing and hold-
Depending on the current position, the power The corresponding door window moves
ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, by press-
windows may also open or close when the air downwards until you release the
ing and holding the lock button (vehicles recirculation button : on the control panel of switch.
with KEYLESS-GO*) on a door handle, the the climate control (컄 page 218) or automatic
automatic reversal function will not operate. climate control* (컄 page 232) is pressed and Closing the door windows
held.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i With the SmartKey in starter switch (컄 page 248) to the resistance point.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- the windows can be operated The corresponding door window moves
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 앫 until you open the driver’s or front passenger upwards until you release the switch.
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised door
access to a vehicle could result in an 앫 for at least 5 minutes Warning! G
accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the door window, and upward movement
of the door window is blocked by some ob-
struction including but not limited to arms,
hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal
will not operate.
249
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully opening the door windows i If the upward movement of a door window is Hinged quarter windows*
(Express-open) blocked during the closing procedure, the door
The switches for opening and closing the
window will stop and open slightly.
왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 hinged quarter windows are located on the
(컄 page 248) past the resistance point 왘 Remove the obstruction. door control panel of the driver’s door
and release. 왘 Pull the respective door window switch (컄 page 35).
The corresponding door window opens past the resistance point again and
completely. release.
250
Controls in detail
Power windows
251
Controls in detail
Power windows
252
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
왔 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Opening and closing
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-
port any objects with sharp edges which can
In the event of an accident, the glass may
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Warning! G shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing malfunctions.
sure that there is no danger of anyone being their seat belts or not wearing them properly The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
harmed by the closing procedure. may be thrown out of the opening. Such an manually should an electrical malfunction occur
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob-
opening also presents a potential for injury (컄 page 503).
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop-
struction that blocks its path in a circum- ! Please keep in mind that weather conditions
erly as entire body parts or portions of them
stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
may protrude from the passenger compart- close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
ment. vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior,
switch past the resistance point, or by
pressing and holding button ‹ on the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the vehicle electronics could be damaged which is
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
Warranty.
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the from the starter switch, take it with you, and
door handle, the automatic reversal function lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso-
will not operate. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an nance noises may result in addition to the usual
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
The opening/closing procedure of the sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
access to a vehicle could result in an
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt- reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-
accident and/or serious personal injury.
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side
was moved past the resistance point and re- window slightly.
leased, by moving the switch in any direc-
tion.
253
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
254
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
왘 Move the sunroof switch in any direc- The opening/closing procedure of the 왘 Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding
tion. tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt- sunroof from the fuse box
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch (컄 page 544).
The movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
was moved past the resistance point and re-
roof stops. i For information on which fuse box contains
leased, by moving the switch in any direc- the fuse for the power tilt/sliding sunroof, see
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is tion. the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit
blocked during the closing procedure, the (컄 page 495). 컄컄
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
255
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
256
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are 앫 Air suspension package Cruise control
described on the following pages: There are two components available.
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control (컄 page 257) and 앫 Vehicle level control (컄 page 281),
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Distronic* (컄 page 262), with which which controls the vehicle level.
the vehicle can maintain a preset The use of cruise control is recommended
앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*
speed. for driving at a constant speed for extend-
(컄 page 280), which adjusts the
ed periods of time. You can set or resume
앫 Distance warning function* vehicle suspension characteristics.
cruise control at any speed above
(컄 page 274) is only available with 앫 Parktronic* (컄 page 290) and rear view 20 mph (30 km/h).
Distronic*, which warns of stationary camera* (컄 page 295), which serve as
obstacle or slower moving vehicles that The cruise control function is operated by
a parking aid.
you are closing in on too quickly. means of the cruise control lever.
For information on the ABS, BAS, EBP,
앫 Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) The cruise control lever is the uppermost
ESP®, and 4-ETS, see “Driving safety sys-
(컄 page 275), which supports you lever on the left-hand side of the steering
tems” (컄 page 103).
when you are driving downhill. column (컄 page 24).
앫 Off-road driving program (컄 page 279) i The cruise control should not be activated
(vehicles without enhanced off-road during off-road driving.
package*), which supports you when
you are driving off-road.
257
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G Warning! G
The cruise control is a convenience system The cruise control brakes automatically so
designed to assist the driver during vehicle that the set speed is not exceeded. The
operation. The driver is and must always brake pedal depresses when the cruise con-
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed trol engages the brakes.
and for safe brake operation. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic including the area under the brake pedal.
and weather conditions make it advisable to Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
travel at a constant speed. movement which could interfere with the 1 Setting current or higher speed
앫 The use of the cruise control can be braking ability of the cruise control system. Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy Do not place your foot under the brake pedal the resistance point) or 5 mph
traffic because conditions do not allow – your foot could become caught. increments (past the resistance point)
safe driving at a constant speed. (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con- 2 Setting current or lower speed
앫 The use of the cruise control can be venience system designed to assist the driv-
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
er during vehicle operation. The driver is and the resistance point) or 5 mph
changes in tire traction can result in
must always remain responsible for the increments (past the resistance point)
wheel spin and loss of control.
vehicle’s speed and for safe brake (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
앫 Deactivate the cruise control when operation.
driving in fog. 3 Canceling cruise control
4 Resume to last set speed
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
258
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom- i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for
grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
the cruise control system.
On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s
braking system. In addition, on longer downhill
grades the automatic transmission will down-
shift automatically.
259
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The cruise control switches off i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
automatically when deactivate the cruise control. After a brief accel- increments
앫 you step on the brake pedal eration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will
resume the last set speed. i The set value is increased in 1 mph
앫 you depress the parking brake pedal (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
The cruise control switches off automatically and the cruise control lever up to the resistance
Setting a higher speed point.
an acoustic warning will sound when
앫 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) Warning! G the resistance point in direction of
앫 the ESP® is in operation arrow 1 (컄 page 258).
If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in
앫 the ESP® is switched off with the ESP® mind that it may take a brief moment until 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
switch (컄 page 107) the vehicle has reached the set speed. The vehicle speed increases in incre-
앫 the ESP® has switched off due to a
Increase the set vehicle speed to a value ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1km/h).
malfunction (컄 page 441)
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
앫 you set the automatic transmission to N speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and Adjustment in 5 mph
while driving
unexpected acceleration of the vehicle (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Observe additional messages in the could cause an accident and/or serious in-
multifunction display that may appear. jury to you and others.
i The set value is increased in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
! Setting the automatic transmission to N you lift the cruise control lever past the
while driving cancels the cruise control. You can increase the speed in two ways. resistance point.
However, the automatic transmission should not
be set to N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
260
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up You can reduce the speed in two ways. Adjustment in 5 mph
past the resistance point in direction of (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
arrow 1 (컄 page 258). i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically i The set value is decreased in 5 mph
왘 Release the cruise control lever. brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. press the cruise control lever down past the
The vehicle speed increases in incre- resistance point.
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will increments
down past the resistance point in direc-
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 258).
moment until the vehicle has reached the set i The set value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you
speed. 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
press the cruise control lever down to the resis-
tance point. The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
Setting a lower speed
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
down to the resistance point in direc- i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Warning! G tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 258). decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep 왘 Release the cruise control lever. speed.
in mind that it may take a brief moment until The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
the vehicle has reached the set speed. ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious in-
jury to you and others.
261
Controls in detail
Driving systems
262
Controls in detail
Driving systems
263
Controls in detail
Driving systems
264
Controls in detail
Driving systems
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
266
Controls in detail
Driving systems
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
268
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up You can reduce the set speed in two ways.
increments past the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 267). i When you use the cruise control lever to
i The set value is increased in 1 mph decelerate, the brake system will automatically
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift 왘 Release the cruise control lever. brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
the cruise control lever up to the resistance does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
point. The vehicle speed increases in incre-
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will increments
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 267). accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set i The set value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you
왘 Release the cruise control lever. speed.
press the cruise control lever down to the resis-
The vehicle speed increases in incre- tance point.
Setting a lower speed
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). 왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direc-
Adjustment in 5 mph Warning! G tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 267).
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
i The set value is increased in 5 mph in mind that it may take a brief moment until
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
the cruise control lever up past the resistance the vehicle has reached the set speed. ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
point. Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious in-
jury to you and others.
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
270
Controls in detail
Driving systems
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance
This means that:
Decreasing the distance setting tells 앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
Distronic to maintain a smaller following after you have changed lanes.
distance to the preceding vehicle.
앫 While in a sharp turn or if the preceding
왘 Turn distance setting switch 1 in vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
direction of arrow 2. lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your
vehicle could then accelerate to the
Driving with Distronic previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance be-
This section describes a number of driving
1 Distance setting switch tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
situations where special precaution is re-
2 To decrease distance of it, but does not register stationary objects
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
3 To increase distance in the road, e.g.:
pared to brake in such situations. Braking
will deactivate the Distronic system. 앫 a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Increasing distance 앫 a disabled vehicle
Increasing the distance setting tells Warning! G 앫 an oncoming vehicle
Distronic to maintain a greater following The driver must always be alert, observe all
distance to the preceding vehicle. Distronic works to maintain the speed se- traffic and intercede as required by means
왘 Turn distance setting switch 1 in lected by the driver unless a moving obsta- of steering or braking the vehicle.
direction of arrow 3. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at your Warning! G
set distance).
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
272
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning Turns and bends Offset driving
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message
DISTRONIC currently unavailable – See
Operator’s Manual appears in the multi-
function display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 430).
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
i If the message DISTRONIC available a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect from your direct line of travel may not be
again appears during driving the dirt (e.g. one too soon. This may cause your vehicle detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi-
slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again, if to brake late or unexpectedly. cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
you reactivate it (컄 page 268).
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
274
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) For more information, see “Off-road driv-
Warning! G ing” (컄 page 357).
If the distance warning lamp l in the in- Warning! G The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. DSR
regulates your vehicle’s speed when driv-
strument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, ing downhill to the value set in the control
Downhill Speed Regulation is a convenience
immediate attention on the part of the driver system (컄 page 186). The steeper the
system designed to assist the driver during
is required. As required by the traffic downhill gradient is, the greater the brake
vehicle operation. The system must be set
situation, apply the brakes and navigate application. On flat road surfaces, DSR
to be appropriate for the topographical and
around a possible obstacle. However, do not brakes only slightly or not at all.
weather conditions encountered which can
drive by relying on the distance warning change quickly. The driver is and must DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in auto-
function, as this will result in an emergency remain at all times responsible for the vehi- matic transmission positions D, or R.
braking application. This will not always cle speed and for safe brake operation.
enable you to avoid a collision, especially i In addition, make use of the engine’s braking
Depending on the programmed speed effect by shifting the automatic transmission
when traveling on varying road surface
(컄 page 186), actual vehicle speed and gra- into a lower gear.
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
dient, switching on the DSR while driving
You can drive slower or faster than the set
Complex driving situations are not always can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly
speed at any time by braking the vehicle or
fully recognized by the distance warning and you may hear a sound which is caused
depressing the accelerator pedal.
function. This could result in wrong or miss- by the activation of the vehicle’s brake sys-
ing distance warnings. tem through the DSR. Sudden and unex-
pected deceleration can result in loss of
왘 Switch on the distance warning vehicle control, causing an accident and/or
function in the control system serious personal injury to you and others.
(컄 page 186). Do not switch on the DSR in a circumstance
where rapid deceleration could result in a
loss of vehicle control.
275
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Whenever DSR is switched on, DSR will use Switching the Downhill Speed
the programmed default speed to regulate the Regulation on/off
vehicle’s speed. The default speed programmed
at the factory is 4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The The switch is located on the upper part of
default speed can be reprogrammed using the the center console.
control system (컄 page 186). The next time DSR
is switched on, DSR will use the newly pro-
grammed default speed to regulate the vehicle’s
speed.
Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set
speed using the cruise control lever
(컄 page 267). Keep in mind that adjusting the Vehicles with enhanced off-road package*
set speed using the cruise control lever with DSR
1 DSR on/off
switched on will not change the programmed
default speed. If DSR is switched off and then 2 Indicator lamp
switched on again, DSR will use the programmed
default speed. Vehicles without enhanced off-road
package*
Depending on the road surface and level of
downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to 1 DSR on/off
maintain the set speed. To maintain the set 2 Indicator lamp
speed, apply the brakes if necessary.
276
Controls in detail
Driving systems
277
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation You can increase or reduce the set speed Reduce set speed:
speed with DSR switched on in two ways.
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
With the DSR switched on (컄 page 276), down to the resistance point in direc-
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
the speed setting can be changed using tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 278).
increments
the cruise control lever.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost i The set value is increased or decreased in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
lever on the left-hand side of the steering ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
you lift or depress the cruise control lever to the
column. resistance point.
Each time the set speed is changed,
Increase set speed: DSR will appear in the multifunction dis-
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to play and the changed set speed is
the resistance point in direction of shown.
arrow 1 (컄 page 278). i The set speed is canceled when DSR is
왘 Release the cruise control lever. switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR
will use the programmed default speed
The vehicle speed increases in incre- (컄 page 186).
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
278
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjustment in 5 mph 왘 Release the cruise control lever. Off-road driving program (Vehicles
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments without enhanced off-road package*)
The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
i The set value is increased or decreased in ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The off-road driving program is designed to
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
Each time the set speed is changed, assist the driver when driving off-road in
you lift or depress the cruise control lever past
the resistance point. DSR will appear in the multifunction dis- terrain and crossing water. The off-road
play and the newly set speed is shown. driving program adjusts the engine power
Increase set speed: and shifting of the automatic transmission
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will to be more suitable for the off-road use of
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that it
past the resistance point in direction of may take a brief moment until the vehicle has the vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and
arrow 1 (컄 page 278). reached the new set speed. 4-ETS designed for off-road use are
automatically activated.
왘 Release the cruise control lever. i The set speed is canceled when DSR is
switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR In the following situations you should
The vehicle speed increases in incre-
will use the programmed default speed switch to the off-road driving program:
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). (컄 page 186).
앫 during off-road driving
Reduce set speed:
앫 when crossing water (컄 page 362)
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point in direc- 앫 when towing up or down on steep
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 278). gradients
279
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The switch is located on the upper part of Switching Off-road driving program on Air suspension package
the center console.
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 280).
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The vehicle level control which regulates the
symbol y appears in the lower ride height of the vehicle. The Adaptive
multifunction display. Damping System (ADS)* optimizes your
vehicle’s suspension tuning.
앫 Suspension tuning: Adaptive Damping
System (ADS)* (컄 page 280)
앫 Vehicle level control (컄 page 281)
280
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The setting is stored when you turn off the 앫 If you are driving with the ADS set-
engine. ting COMF or AUTO, the vehicle is
raised back to highway level as your
driving speed decreases.
앫 You can select the high-speed level
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package* via the ADS setting SPORT. In ADS
1 ADS switch Sport, the vehicle is lowered direct-
2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting ly to high-speed level as your driv-
3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting ing speed increases.
281
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The parked vehicle begins adjusting to the ! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven ter-
set vehicle level as soon the doors and tail- Warning! G rain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may
gate are cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle with the ground and result in damage to the vehi-
앫 unlocked cle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has
level, the center of gravity also rises. There-
or fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to
a lower level.
as low as possible. With higher ride height
앫 opened or closed with the vehicle
the ESP® may activate earlier in certain ! Before jacking up the vehicle with equip-
unlocked
situations. ment that lifts one or more of the wheels com-
In order to operate the vehicle level control pletely off of the ground, remove the SmartKey
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
switch (컄 page 283), however, the engine from the starter switch.
changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
must be running.
changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot ! Please also note the information in the sec-
prevent accidents, including those resulting tion on towing (컄 page 540).
Warning! G from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot pre- For information on off-road driving, see
vent the natural laws of physics from acting “Off-road driving” (컄 page 357).
Make sure that no one is near the wheel on the vehicle.
housing or under the vehicle when you lower
the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs
could become wedged into or under the ve-
hicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or
the tailgate is opened and will continue after
the door is closed again.
282
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicles without enhanced Off-road Basic settings The following is the approximate change in
Package* ride height for each of the level settings:
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
The switch is located on the upper part of can be selected using the vehicle level
Level Ride height
the center console. switch in the center console:
Raised + 3.1 in (80 mm)
Level Driving situation Highway +/- 0 in (0 mm)
Raised For off-road driving or driv- High-speed - 0.6 in (-15 mm)
ing in rough terrain. The in-
dicator lamp is on.
i Vehicles with ADS*:
Highway For driving on paved roads Depending on the ADS setting (컄 page 280), the
in fair or better condition. vehicle will be lowered to the high-speed level
The indicator lamp is off. when traveling at higher speeds. At speeds
below 40 mph (64 km/h) at the latest, it will be
returned to the highway level.
1 Vehicle level switch i The third available level is the high-speed
2 Indicator lamp level that is set automatically. i The high-speed level is not available if tow-
ing a trailer. For more information on towing a
trailer, see “Trailer towing” (컄 page 366).
283
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Raised level The following message appears in the mul- Highway level
tifunction display while the level is being
Only select the raised level if appropriate
set: ! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads,
for the driving situation encountered. adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause
Otherwise: the vehicle underbody to come in contact with
the road and result in damage to the vehicle un-
앫 fuel consumption may increase derbody. Always make sure the vehicle has suffi-
앫 handling characteristics of the vehicle cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a
lower level.
may be unfavorable
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 41).
i You can select the raised level at speeds up
to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds, the i The message can be cleared by pressing If indicator lamp 2 (컄 page 283) is on.
message n Level selection not the è ÿ k or button j on the
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 283).
permitted appears in the multifunction dis- multifunction steering wheel.
play. Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
When the raised level is reached, indicator
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 41). lamp 2 (컄 page 283) comes on continu- adjusts to the highway level.
If indicator lamp 2 (컄 page 283) is off. ously and the following message appears The following message appears in the
in the multifunction display for 5 seconds: multifunction display while the level is
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 283). being set:
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the raised level.
284
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The message can be cleared by pressing Vehicles with enhanced Off-road Basic settings
the è ÿ k or button j on the Package*
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
multifunction steering wheel.
The switch is located on the upper part of can be selected using the vehicle level
When the highway level is reached, indica- the center console. switch in the center console:
tor lamp 2 (컄 page 283) goes out. The
following message appears in the multi- Level Driving situation
function display for 5 seconds: Off-road 3 For slow driving on
rough terrain. Lower,
middle and upper indi-
cator lamps are on.
Off-road 2 Off-road driving. Lower
and middle indicator
lamps are on.
i The vehicle is lowered automatically to the Off-road 1 For driving on easy ter-
highway level if: 1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring
2 Set higher vehicle level rain. Lower indicator
앫 the vehicle speed is above 55 mph lamp is on.
(88 km/h)
3 Indicator lamps
4 Set lower vehicle level Highway For normal driving. In-
앫 the speed stays between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately dicator lamps are off.
20 seconds
i Another available level is the high-speed
level that is set automatically.
285
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following is the approximate change in You can only select the off-road levels be- Off-road levels
ride height for each of the level settings: low a certain speed. At higher speeds, the
286
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If you are driving too fast while using 왘 Turn outer adjustment ring 1 i The message can be cleared by pressing
off-road level 3, you will see the following (컄 page 285) repeatedly until indicator the è ÿ k or button j on the
message in the multifunction display: lamp 3 (컄 page 285) of the desired multifunction steering wheel.
level flashes. When the off-road level 2 is reached, the
앫 Reduce speed to
under 20 mph (30 km/h) 앫 Off-road level 1, lower indicator following message appears in the multi-
lamp flashes function display for 5 seconds:
Additional an acoustic signal sounds.
앫 Off-road level 2, lower and middle
i This message cannot be deactivated. indicator lamps flashes
For more information, see “Display messages”
(컄 page 492). 앫 Off-road level 3, lower, middle and
upper indicator lamps flashes
Only use the off-road levels when neces-
sary. The vehicle adjusts to the correspond-
Otherwise: ing off-road level. The lower and middle indicator lamps 3
For example, the following message (컄 page 285) comes on continuously.
앫 fuel consumption may increase
appears in the multifunction display while While the vehicle is adjusting from off-road
앫 handling characteristics of the vehicle the level is being set: level 2 to off-road level 3, you will see, for
may be unfavorable
example, the following message in the
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 41). multifunction display:
287
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄Once off-road level 3 is reached, you will 앫 If you continue to increase your speed, Once off-road level 2 is reached, you will
see, for example, the following message in the message remains in the multifunc- see, for example, the following message in
the multifunction display: tion display. the multifunction display:
The new level will not be shown until
the vehicle has been able to adjust to a
level appropriate for the speed at
which you are currently driving.
앫 If you maintain or reduce your speed,
you will see, for example, the following
i The message Max. 20 mph reminds you of message in the multifunction display While driving, the vehicle is automatically
the maximum permissible driving speed with while the vehicle is lowering: lowered as follows:
off-road level 3.
앫 At speeds above 55 mph (88 km/h) or
If you drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the speed lies between 40 mph
for a short period while using off-road (64 km/h) and 55 mph (88 km/h) for
level 3, the following message appears in approximately 20 seconds, the
the multifunction display: off-road level 2 setting is canceled and
the vehicle is lowered to the off-road
level 1.
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.
288
Controls in detail
Driving systems
You will see, for example, the following 앫 Depending on the ADS setting If one or more of the indicator lamps
message in the multifunction display: (컄 page 280), the vehicle will be low- (컄 page 283) are on:
ered to the high-speed level when trav-
왘 Press switch 2 (컄 page 285)
eling at higher speeds. At speeds below
repeatedly until all lit indicator
25 mph (40 km/h) at the latest, it will
lamps 3 flash.
be returned to the highway level.
The vehicle adjusts to the highway
i The setting is stored when you turn off the level.
engine.
앫 At speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h) The following message appears in the
the off-road level 1 setting is canceled Highway level multifunction display while the level is
and the vehicle is lowered to the high- being set:
way level.
! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads,
adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause
You will see, for example, the following the vehicle underbody to come in contact with
message in the multifunction display: the road and result in damage to the vehicle un-
derbody. Always make sure the vehicle has suffi-
cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a
lower level.
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 41). i The message can be cleared by pressing
the è ÿ k or button j on the
multifunction steering wheel.
289
Controls in detail
Driving systems
290
Controls in detail
Driving systems
291
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
ative distance between the sensors and an
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) system is operational when the readiness
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
indicators 3 are illuminated.
front area is located above the center air
Rear sensors vents in the dashboard. The warning indi- The current transmission position deter-
cator for the rear area is located in the rear mines which warning indicator will be acti-
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) passenger compartment under the roof. vated.
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Automatic trans- Warning indicator
mission position
Minimum distance
D Front area activated
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) R or N Front and rear area
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) activated
P Neither activated
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If Front area warning indicator
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
1 Left side of the vehicle
distance, the actual distance may no
2 Right side of the vehicle
longer be indicated by the system.
3 Readiness indicators
292
Controls in detail
Driving systems
293
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching off Parktronic system* malfunction 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 42).
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1. If only the red distance segments illumi- 왘 Clean the Parktronic system sensors
nate and an acoustic warning sounds, (컄 page 430).
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
system. The Parktronic system will auto-
Switching on or
matically switch off after 20 seconds and
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1 once more. the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch 왘 Check the Parktronic system operation
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. comes on. at another location to rule out interfer-
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
i The Parktronic system switches on signals.
automatically when you switch on the ignition by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
(컄 page 42). Truck Center as soon as possible.
Vehicles with original equipment Mercedes-Benz If only the red distance segments illumi-
Trailer Hitch Kit: nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
The rear Parktronic sensor will automatically Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g.
disengage when towing a trailer.
slush, snow or ice) or there is an interfer-
ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals
(e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or
the air brakes of trucks). The Parktronic
system will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
294
Controls in detail
Driving systems
295
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The rear view camera is an optical parking Switching the rear view camera on and
aid. It shows you the area behind the vehi- off
cle in the COMAND system display when
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
reverse gear R is engaged, for example
during parallel parking. 왘 Shift the automatic transmission in
position R (컄 page 194).
The rear view camera is located near the
tailgate handle. The area behind the vehicle appears in
the COMAND system display.
i The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image, like
in the rear view mirror.
296
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Carriers* ! Load the carriers* in such a way that the
vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure
Warning! G 앫 the tailgate can be completely opened
Only use carriers* when the basic cross 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof can be completely
bars have been completely mounted. The raised at the rear
left and right roof rails are only stabilized by i The following accessories are available for
means of the basic cross bars mounted. your Mercedes-Benz:
Follow the manufacturer’s installation 앫 Roof Cargo Container – Small, Medium, or
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly at- Large Roof rails
tached roof rack system or its load could be- 앫 Ski and Snowboard Carrier – Standard
Basic cross bars*
come detached from the vehicle. 앫 Ski and Snowboard Carrier – Deluxe (Only in
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of connection with corresponding adapter.) The maximum roof load (컄 page 559) of
198 lb (90 kg).
any add-on roof equipment is reduced by
For more information on Mercedes-Benz acces-
sories, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz the unladen weight of the basic cross bars
Take into consideration that when the roof is (13.7 Ibs/6.2 kg).
Light Truck Center.
loaded, the handling characteristics are dif-
ferent from those when operating the vehi- Four keys and an Allen wrench required for
cles without a roof loaded. installing and removing are included with
the basic cross bars.
i The keys and the Allen wrench are stored
with the vehicle tool kit under the cargo compart-
ment floor (컄 page 495).
297
Controls in detail
Loading
i Spare parts are available as Mercedes-Benz accident, thereby injuring you and other per- Do not use lubricant on the screws of the
accessories. Contact your authorized
sons and/or causing damage to property, basic cross bars. The screws could work
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
including damage to your vehicle. loose and the basic cross bars could be-
come detached from your vehicle, together
Installing the basic cross bars
with the objects attached to them causing
Warning! G an accident, thereby injuring you and other
Warning! G persons and/or causing damage to proper-
Every time the basic cross bars are mount- ty, including damage to your vehicle.
Please follow these installation instructions ed, before you set off on a journey and peri-
carefully. Caution should be exercised to odically during longer journeys, check all the
avoid damage to the vehicle while installing screws on the bars to make sure that they Warning! G
the basic cross bars. Also, be careful not to are secure, and tighten them if necessary.
injure yourself or others while installing and Repeat these checks at regular intervals as Only install the basic cross bars at the exact
adjusting the basic cross bars or loading road-surface conditions dictate, and at least locations designated on the roof rails. The
items on them. after every 1500 miles (2500 km) of contin- designated locations for the front basic
Each individual step of the installation in- uous use. cross bars are between the markings en-
structions, the warning notices, the general Otherwise, the basic cross bars, mounted graved on the inside of the roof rails
safety precautions and the instructions for accessories and the objects attached to (컄 page 300). The designated locations for
use must be followed exactly. If the basic them could come loose from the vehicle the rear basic cross bars are between the
cross bars are not mounted correctly, they causing an accident, thereby injuring you gaps on the roof rails (컄 page 300).
and the objects attached to them could and other persons and/or causing damage
come loose from your vehicle and cause an to property, including damage to your vehi-
cle.
298
Controls in detail
Loading
299
Controls in detail
Loading
300
Controls in detail
Loading
왘 Place rear basic cross bar 7 on roof 왘 Store key and Allen wrench back into The clamping widths of the basic cross
rails a in such a way that the clamping the storage well (컄 page 495). bars are factory set for your vehicle. These
claws reach into gaps 8 (컄 page 300) clamping widths are solely intended for the
on the roof rails. Adjusting the clamping widths of the designated positions.
basic cross bars
왘 Make sure clamping claw 5 lies flush Only install the basic cross bars at the des-
against the inside of roof rail a as ignated locations and pay attention to the
shown in the illustration (컄 page 300). Warning! G stickers 3 FRONT and REAR
(컄 page 300).
If necessary, adjust clamping width of
Only install the basic cross bars at the exact
basic cross bars (컄 page 301).
locations designated on the roof rails. The
왘 Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides designated locations for the front basic
by turning it clockwise. cross bars are between the markings en-
왘 On the front and rear basic cross bars graved on the inside of the roof rails
tighten screws 4. Observe a (컄 page 300). The designated locations for
tightening torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm). the rear basic cross bars are between the
gaps on the roof rails (컄 page 300).
301
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄왘 Pull cover strip c out of groove until Removing the basic cross bars Shortening the cover strip
you see screws b on each end of the
The cover strips reduce the wind noise
basic cross bar.
caused by the basic cross bars. In order to
왘 Turn screws b on both sides counter- install add-on roof equipment, it may be
clockwise approximately 2 rotations. necessary to shorten the cover strips.
왘 Place the basic cross bar at designated
locations (컄 page 300) on roof rails.
왘 On both sides, make sure the clamping
claws 5 lie flush against the roof rails.
If necessary pull out or push in the
clamping claws 5. 1 Key
2 Cover cap
왘 Tighten screws b. Observe a
3 Sticker FRONT (or REAR)
tightening torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
4 Screw for clamping claw
The width of the clamping claws is 5 Clamping claw
c Cover strip
correctly adjusted.
왘 Unlock cover cap 2 with key 1. 왘 Pull cover strip c out of groove.
왘 Press cover strip c piece by piece into
왘 Remove cover cap 2.
groove of basic cross bar.
왘 Turn screws for clamping claws 5
왘 Install the basic cross bars as
counterclockwise until the basic cross
described (컄 page 300).
bars can be lifted from the roof rails.
302
Controls in detail
Loading
303
Controls in detail
Loading
The gross vehicle weight which is the Please pay attention to and comply with i The cargo compartment is the preferred
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the following instructions when loading the place to carry objects. The expanded cargo com-
spare wheel, installed accessories, pas- vehicle and transporting cargo: partment (컄 page 306) should only be used for
sengers and luggage/cargo must never items which do not fit in the cargo compartment
앫 Always place items being carried alone.
exceed the load limit and Gross Vehicle
against front or rear seat backrests,
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as
and fasten them as securely as possi- Cargo tie-down rings
specified on the placard located on the
ble.
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 550). In addi-
앫 The heaviest portion of the cargo Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo
tion, the load must be distributed in such a
should always be kept as low as possi- tie-down rings.
way so that the weight on each axle never
exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating ble against front or rear seat backrests. Carefully secure cargo by applying even
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The For additional safety when transporting load on all rings with rope of sufficient
GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi- cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied, strength to hold down the cargo.
cated on the certification label which can fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into
be found on the driver’s door B-pillar i While the cargo net* (컄 page 313) will help
the opposite side buckles. protect you from smaller objects, it cannot pre-
(컄 page 550). vent the movement of large, heavier objects into
For more information, see “Tire and Load- the passenger compartment in an accident, dur-
ing hard braking or sudden maneuvers. Such
ing Information” (컄 page 389).
items must be properly secured using the cargo
The handling characteristics of a fully load- tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
304
Controls in detail
Loading
305
Controls in detail
Loading
G
consciousness and death.
Warning!
When expanding the cargo compartment, ! When the second-row seats are folded for-
always fully fold the corresponding seats ward, the front seats may not be moved to the
and, if so equipped, always use the rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage
the front and second-row seats.
cargo net* (컄 page 313) when transporting
cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
1 Hook
rests must remain properly locked in the up-
Use the hooks to secure light weight items right position.
only. The maximum permissible weight per
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
hook is 9 lb (4 kg).
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and can cause
injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 304).
306
Controls in detail
Loading
Expanding cargo compartment in part Two buttons are located on the right side Two buttons are located on the
trim of the third-row seats. passenger-side in the cargo compartment
Folding third-row seats, electrically
i Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold
down the left third-row seat.
Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold down
the right third-row seat.
There are several ways to fold the third-row
seats.
Example, button for the left third-row seat Example, button for the right third-row seat
1 Button for returning third-row seats to 1 Button for returning third-row seats to
upright position upright position
2 Button for folding the third-row seats 2 Button for folding the third-row seats
i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats
down when the rear right door is open. down when the tailgate is open.
왘 Push in the head restraints of the
third-row seats all the way
(컄 page 137).
왘 Remove cargo compartment cover
blind (컄 page 312). 컄컄
307
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄왘 Press and hold button 2 for each side Expanding cargo compartment fully
Objects placed on folded second-row seats
until the third-row seats are fully fold-
may come loose during braking, vehicle ma-
ed.
Warning! G neuvers, or an accident and be thrown
around the vehicle interior. Objects thrown
Folded second-row seats are intended to around the vehicle interior may cause an ac-
serve as a cargo compartment expansion in cident and/or serious personal injury.
conjunction with folded third-row seats only.
Do not fold the second-row seats and allow Folding second-row seats
third-row seat occupants to use folded sec-
ond-row seats as a footrest while driving. ! When the second-row seats are folded for-
Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehi- ward, the front seats may not be moved to the re-
armost position. Otherwise you could damage
cle occupants, keep both feet on the floor in
the front and second-row seats.
front of their seat. Otherwise, occupants
If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, could slide under their seat belt in a colli- 왘 Push in the head restraints of the
for example, the message 3rd row of sion. If occupants slide under the belt, it second-row seats all the way
seats, Right not locked appears in the would apply force at the abdomen or neck. (컄 page 137).
multifunction display (컄 page 157). That could cause serious or even fatal inju-
왘 Press and hold button 2 again, until ries. Do not fold the second-row seats and
the message disappears. allow third-row seat occupants to use folded
second-row seats as a table while driving.
308
Controls in detail
Loading
1 Strap 3 Lever
2 Seat cushion
왘 Pull and hold lever 3 in direction of
왘 Pull strap 1 in direction of arrow. arrow at resistance point.
왘 Fold seat cushion 2 forward. The seat backrest folds down.
왘 Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the seat backrest.
309
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding third-row seats, electrically i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats 왘 Remove cargo compartment cover
down when the rear right door is open. blind (컄 page 312).
i Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold
down the left third-row seat. Two buttons are located on the 왘 Press and hold button 2 for each side
Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold down passenger-side in the cargo compartment until the third-row seats are fully fold-
the right third-row seat. ed.
There are several ways to fold the third-row The cargo compartment is fully extend-
seats. ed.
Two buttons are located on the right side
trim of the third-row seats.
310
Controls in detail
Loading
311
Controls in detail
Loading
312
Controls in detail
Loading
왘 Pull blind 2 to the left against the i Before installing cargo compartment cover Cargo net*
spring pressure until the spring in the blind behind the third-row seats, fold the left or
cover audibly engages. right third-row seat forward (컄 page 307). After-
313
Controls in detail
Loading
Use of the cargo net is a particularly impor- 앫 With the cargo compartment expanded Installing the cargo net
tant safety factor when the vehicle is load- in part (컄 page 307), use holders
ed higher than the top of the seat above C-pillars 2 and the cargo
backrests with smaller objects. For your tie-down rings behind the third-row
safety, always use the cargo net when seat backrest (컄 page 305).
transporting cargo.
앫 With the cargo compartment fully ex-
The cargo net can be installed in two panded (컄 page 308), use holders
locations: above B-pillars 1 and the cargo
tie-down rings in the second-row foot-
well (컄 page 305).
왘 Open the zipper on the cargo net pack- Cargo net bar hung up behind the B-pillar
age.
1 Holder
왘 Roll out the cargo net. 2 Cargo net bar
왘 Unfold the cargo net. 왘 Hang cargo net bar 2 on holder 1 as
The cargo net bars must audibly indicated by the arrow.
engage. 왘 Push cargo net bar 2 forward into
1 Holder in B-pillar holder 1 in direction of arrow.
2 Holder in C-pillar
314
Controls in detail
Loading
Pulling the cargo net tight Loosening the cargo net Removing and storing the cargo net
왘 Take cargo net bar 2 out of holder 1,
see “Installing the cargo net”
(컄 page 314).
왘 Press the red button on the upper and
lower cargo net bar.
왘 Fold the cargo net.
왘 Roll up the cargo net.
왘 Close the zipper on the cargo net pack-
Belt hook attached in the second-row foot- Belt hook attached in the second-row foot- age.
well well
1 Belt hook 1 Buckle
2 Cargo tie-down ring 2 Belt hook
3 Tightening belt 3 Cargo tie-down ring
왘 Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie-down 왘 Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
ring 2 in direction of arrow. buckle 1 upward in direction of arrow.
왘 Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end 왘 Remove belt hook 2 from cargo
in direction of arrow until the cargo net tie-down ring 3.
is pulled tight.
왘 After driving a short distance, make
sure the cargo net is still tight and, if
necessary, pull it tight again.
315
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
If so equipped, always use the cargo net* 1 Glove box lid release 1 Release button
when transporting cargo. The cargo net* 2 Glove box lid 2 AUX-socket (Vehicles without Rear
cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Seat Entertainment System*)
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob-
Opening the glove box 3 CD changer
jects. 왘 Pull lid release 1 in direction of arrow. 왘 Open the glove box (컄 page 316).
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help Glove box lid 2 opens downward. 왘 Press release button 1.
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
CD changer 3 is released and swings
about and injuring vehicle occupants during Closing the glove box
down automatically.
앫 braking 왘 Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
For information on CD changer operation,
앫 vehicle maneuvers see separate COMAND system operating
앫 an accident instructions.
316
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing CD changer Locking and unlocking the glove box 왘 Insert mechanical key into glove box
separately lock.
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 2 to
when the vehicle is in the shop for service. lock the glove box.
왘 Take the mechanical key out of the 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 1 to
SmartKey or SmartKey with unlock the glove box.
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 500).
i The glove box can only be locked or
unlocked with the mechanical key.
1 CD changer
왘 Gently push CD changer 1 up in direc-
tion of arrow until it engages.
For information on CD changer operation,
see separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
1 Unlocking glove box
2 Locking glove box
317
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in front center Storage compartment* (depending on Storage compartment/telephone* tray
console vehicle configuration) under front center armrest
The storage compartment and the
Vehicles without ashtray*
telephone* tray can be opened separately.
318
Controls in detail
Useful features
319
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel nets Parcel net in front passenger footwell Parcel nets on front seat backrests
A small convenience parcel net is located A small convenience parcel net is located
Warning! G in the front passenger footwell. It is intend-
ed for small and light items, such as road
on each of the front seat backrests. It is in-
tended for small and light items, such as
maps, mail, etc. road maps, mail, etc.
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the
parcel net on the back of the front passen-
ger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant Classifi-
cation System* OCS (컄 page 81) may not
be able to properly approximate the occu-
pant weight category.
Parcel nets are intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the 1 Parcel net 1 Parcel net
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
320
Controls in detail
Useful features
321
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders in third-row side trim Removing and reinstalling cup holder Ashtrays*
Cup holders are located in the side trims of The front cup holder can be removed for
Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray
the third-row seats. cleaning purposes.
and a cigarette lighter (컄 page 324) locat-
ed in the front center console and an ash-
tray located in front of the second-row
seats (컄 page 323).
i If your vehicle is not equipped with a smok-
ing package*, it has a storage compartment
(컄 page 318) with a power outlet (컄 page 325)
instead.
322
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the ashtray Rear center console ashtray Opening rear ashtray
(second-row)
왘 Briefly touch cover plate 2. 왘 Briefly press ashtray cover 2.
The ashtray opens automatically. ! Close the ashtray when not in use and be- The ashtray 1 opens automatically.
fore folding the second-row seats
Removing ashtray insert Removing rear ashtray insert
왘 Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
Warning! G out upwards.
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing Reinstalling rear ashtray insert
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
왘 Install ashtray insert.
from movement. Set automatic transmis-
sion to P. With the automatic transmission 왘 Close the ashtray.
set to P, turn off the engine.
Cigarette lighter
1 Ashtray
왘 Grip the ashtray insert 1 on the sides 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
2 Ashtray cover
and pull it out upwards.
왘 Push in cigarette lighter.
Reinstalling ashtray insert The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
matically when hot.
왘 Install ashtray insert 1.
왘 Close ashtray cover plate 2.
323
Controls in detail
Useful features
324
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlets Power outlets are located 왘 Pull out cover 1 and insert electrical
plug (cigarette lighter type).
앫 in the front center console
! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle, (컄 page 325)
make sure that the maximum current drawn i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking
package*, the storage compartment contains an
does not exceed 55 A. 앫 in the front passenger footwell
ashtray with cigarette lighter (컄 page 324) in-
(컄 page 325)
i The power outlets can be used to stead.
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories 앫 in the second-row footwell
(e.g. auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 240 W. (컄 page 326) Power outlet in front passenger
If the engine is off, the battery may become dis- footwell
앫 on the left-hand side of the cargo com-
charged if used for long periods of time.
partment (컄 page 326)
i You can use the power outlets, except for
the power outlet in the front center console, Power outlet in front center console
even if the ignition is switched off.
An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the
vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a
minimum level. If the voltage drops to this mini-
mum level, the power outlets are automatically
switched off. This ensures that enough power re-
mains to start the engine.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
1 Power outlet cover
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
왘 Open cover plate (컄 page 318).
325
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1
(컄 page 327).
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
Before driving off, check that the floormats
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug 왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
(cigarette lighter type). (cigarette lighter type). essary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal move-
ment.
326
Controls in detail
Useful features
Seat cover under third-row seats 왘 Reach into the recess in the seat cover.
왘 Pull the seat cover in the direction of
If something falls under the third-row
the arrow.
seats, you can remove the seat cover in
order to reach under the seats. Remove the seat cover to reach under
the seats.
Removing seat cover
Installing seat cover
왘 Fold the seat halfway in or out
(컄 page 307).
1 Retainer pin
왘 Put the seat cover back into place
2 Eyelet
using the guide pins.
Removing 왘 Press the seat cover down until it
engages.
왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.
왘 Make sure that the seat cover is
왘 Remove the floormat.
engaged properly by folding the seat all
Example passenger side
the way in and out.
Installing 왘 Fold the respective seat halfway in or
왘 Lay down the floormat in the respective out (컄 page 307).
footwell.
왘 Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
tainer pins 1.
327
Controls in detail
Useful features
328
Controls in detail
Useful features
329
Controls in detail
Useful features
330
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing mobile phone from mobile Changing mobile phone cradle 왘 Press release button in direction of
phone cradle arrow 1 and take mobile phone
If you require a different cradle for your
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
before installing a new one.
Installing a different mobile phone cra-
dle
Removing an existing mobile phone
cradle
Example illustration
1 Release catch for mobile phone
2 Mobile phone cradle
i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open Example illustration
flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis- Example illustration 1 Contact plate
connected. 2 Recesses
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘 Press release catch in direction of 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of 3 Mobile phone cradle 왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
mobile phone cradle 2. recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
331
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid The Tele Aid system 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system Demand)
the Information button ¡, depend-
may only be performed by completing the sub- ing on the type of response required.
scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance The Tele Aid system consists of three
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete types of response: i The SOS button is located in the overhead
either of these steps will result in a system that control panel (컄 page 34).
is not activated. 앫 automatic and manual emergency The Roadside Assistance button •
If you have any questions regarding activation, 앫 roadside assistance (컄 page 336) and the Information button ¡
please call the Response Center at (컄 page 337) are located below the center arm-
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 앫 information rest cover.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The Tele Aid system is operational provid- ! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
Shortly after the completion of your ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, network for communication and the GPS (Global
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive properly connected, not damaged and cel- Positioning System) satellites for vehicle loca-
a user ID and password. By visiting lular and GPS coverage is available. tion. If either of these signals are unavailable, the
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” Tele Aid system may not function and if this
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can occurs, assistance must be summoned by other
(USA only), you will have access to account be adjusted by using the volume control on means.
information, remote door unlock and the COMAND system or on the multifunc-
more. tion steering wheel. To raise, turn the rota-
ry volume control on COMAND system
clockwise or press button æ on the
multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
turn the rotary volume control on
COMAND system control counterclock-
wise or press button ç on the multi-
function steering wheel.
332
Controls in detail
Useful features
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the System self-check
COMAND system audio is muted and the select-
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
Warning! G
ed mode (radio, CD etc.) pauses. The optional
cellular phone (if installed) inserted in cradle malfunctions are detected and indicated If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
switches off. If you must use this phone, we rec- (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
ommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a Roadside Assistance button • and the the Information button remain illuminated
standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone Information button ¡ stay on longer continuously in red and/or the message
from the cradle and place the call. The naviga- than 10 seconds or do not come on).
tion* system (if engaged) will continue to run. Tele Aid – inoperative is displayed in
The display in the instrument cluster is available The message Tele Aid – inoperative the multifunction display after the system
for use, and spoken commands are only avail- appears in the multifunction display. self-check, a malfunction in the system has
able by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND been detected.
system. A pop-up window will appear in the
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele
Aid call is in progress. After the TeleAid call has above, the system may not operate as
ended, the optional cellular phone inserted in the expected. Have the system checked at the
cradle switches on again. A PIN entry might be nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
necessary. as soon as possible.
333
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls Once the emergency call is in progress, the The Tele Aid system is available if
indicator lamp on the SOS button will
An emergency call is initiated automatical- 앫 it has been activated and is operation-
begin to flash. The message
ly following an accident in which the emer- al. Activation requires a subscription
Connecting call appears in the multifunc-
gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or for monitoring services, connection
tion display. When the connection is estab-
air bags deploy. and cellular air time
lished, the message Call connected
An emergency call can also be initiated appears in the multifunction display. All in- 앫 vehicle battery power is available
manually by opening the cover next to the formation relevant to the emergency, such 앫 the relevant cellular phone network
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then as the location of the vehicle (determined and GPS signals are available and pass
briefly pressing the button located under by the GPS satellite location system), vehi- the information on to the Response
the cover. See (컄 page 335) for cle model, identification number and color Center
instructions on initiating an emergency call are generated.
manually. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos-
A voice connection between the Response sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
Center and the occupants of the vehicle the GPS satellite network and pass the informa-
will be established automatically soon af- tion on to the Response Center.
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
334
Controls in detail
Useful features
335
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • When the connection is established, the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
message Call connected appears in the dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
The Roadside Assistance button • is
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
located below the center armrest cover.
will transmit data generating the vehicle tow your vehicle to the nearest
identification number, model, color and Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For
location (subject to availability of cellular services such as labor and/or towing,
and GPS signals). charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
Assistance Manual for more information.
i While the call is connected you can change
to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV The following is only available in the USA:
button on the COMAND system unit.
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such
A voice connection between the Roadside as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants the replacement of a flat tire with the
of the vehicle will be established. vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
1 Roadside Assistance button •
왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
왘 Open the storage tray (컄 page 319). sistance.
왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display.
336
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Information button ¡ When the connection is established, the
Assistance button • remains illuminated in message Call connected appears in the
The Information button ¡ is located
red for approximately 10 seconds during the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
system self-check after switching on the ignition below the center armrest cover.
will transmit data generating the vehicle
(together with the SOS button and the Informa- identification number, model, color and lo-
tion button ¡).
cation (subject to availability of cellular
See system self-check (컄 page 333) if the indi- and GPS signals).
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds. i While the call is connected, you can change
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV
button • is flashing continuously and there button on the COMAND system.
was no voice connection to the Response Center A voice connection between the Customer
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
Assistance Center representative and the
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network was not available). occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
The message Call failed appears in the mul-
1 Information button ¡ lished. Information regarding the operation
tifunction display. 왘 Open the storage tray (컄 page 318). of your vehicle, the nearest
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or
왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer
ing the t button on the multifunction steer- Mercedes-Benz USA products and servic-
ing wheel or the END Button on the COMAND
than 2 seconds). es is available to you.
system. A call to the Customer Assistance For more details concerning the Tele Aid
Center will be initiated. The button will system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
flash while the call is in progress. The use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
message Connecting call will appear arately) to learn more (USA only).
in the multifunction display.
337
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The indicator lamp in the Information ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu- the system does not reset, contact the Response
approximately 10 seconds during the system minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- has detected a malfunction or the service is not 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
er with the SOS button and the Roadside currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Assistance button •). your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer
See system self-check (컄 page 333) if the indi- Center and have the system checked or contact Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the
longer than approximately 10 seconds. USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as Remote door unlock
possible.
If the indicator lamp in the Information In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
was no voice connection to the Response Center
Call priority
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
established, then the Tele Aid system could not If other service calls such as a Roadside
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel- Assistance call or Information call are 왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
lular phone network is not available). The mes- Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
active, an Emergency call is still possible.
sage Call failed appears in the multifunction or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
display. In this case, the Emergency call will take
priority and override all other active calls. You will be asked to provide your pass-
Information calls can be terminated using
word which you provided when you
the t button on the multifunction steering i The indicator lamp in the respective button
wheel or the END button on the COMAND sys- flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency completed the subscriber agreement.
tem. calls can only be terminated by a Response 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the
Center or Customer Assistance Center repre-
tailgate recessed handle for minimum
sentative, whereas Roadside Assistance and
Information calls can also be terminated by of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
pressing button t on the multifunction flashing.
steering wheel or using the END button on the The message Connecting call ap-
COMAND system.
pears in the multifunction display.
338
Controls in detail
Useful features
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener
cle via Internet using the ID and password
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
sent to you shortly after the completion of The integrated remote control is capable of
your acquaintance call. 왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
The police will issue a numbered devices. It provides a convenient way to re-
The Response Center will then unlock your
incident report. place up to three hand-held remote con-
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
trols used to operate devices such as
feature. 왘 Pass this number on to the garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-
i The remote door unlock feature is available Mercedes-Benz Response Center along er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
if the relevant cellular phone network is avail- with your password issued to you when some other systems.
able. you subscribed to the service.
Before the integrated remote control can
The SOS button will flash and the message The Response Center will then attempt be used, it must be programmed to the ga-
Connecting call will appear in the multifunc- to covertly contact the vehicle’s
tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
rage door opener, gate operator or other
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is device you wish to operate. See the follow-
command.
located, the Response Center will ing instructions for programming informa-
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center contact the local law enforcement and
specialist may attempt to establish voice contact tion.
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
with the vehicle occupants.
provided to law enforcement.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho- i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
rization was received by the Response Center, than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically
you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail- to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm
gate recessed handle again. system (컄 page 111).
339
Controls in detail
Useful features
340
Controls in detail
Useful features
341
Controls in detail
Useful features
342
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 4: i Upon completion of programming the inte- Operation of integrated remote control
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
hand-held remote control that came with the ga-
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release rage door opener, gate operator or other device. 왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
this button until it has been successful- You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu- grated signal transmitter button (2,
ly trained. ture programming of an integrated remote con- 3 or 4) to activate the remote con-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
왘 While still holding down the signal trolled device.
remote control to operate the respective device
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), in other situations. The integrated remote control trans-
“cycle” your hand-held remote control mitter continues to send the signal as
button 6 as follows: Press and hold Reprogramming a single signal trans- long as the button is pressed – up to
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release mitter button 20 seconds.
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- To program a device using a signal trans-
mitter button previously trained, follow Erasing the integrated remote control
quence on the hand-held remote con- memory
trol until the frequency signal has been these steps:
learned. Upon successful training, 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and 왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer
왘 Press and hold the desired signal
then rapidly after several seconds. signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and Do not release the button. for approximately 20 seconds, until
step 6 to complete. indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af- not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
signal transmitter button, proceed with The codes of all three channels are
programming starting with step 3. erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
343
Controls in detail
Useful features
344
Controls in detail
Useful features
Compass To make sure the display is correct, the Infrared reflecting windshield*
compass must be set to the proper geo-
graphic zone (컄 page 181). It may also be
Calling up the compass
necessary to calibrate the compass
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly (컄 page 182).
until the off-road menu appears in the
multifunction display. i If the compass is not calibrated or its
function is impaired by outside influences, the
The compass displays the direction message Compass - - - appears in the
into which the vehicle is currently trav- multifunction display.
eling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
345
346
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
347
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. the engine, the transfer case, the center
differential or the rear differential has been
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads
replaced.
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of i Always obey applicable speed limits.
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫 Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1
(컄 page 200) only when driving at
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
348
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption is also increased by Pedals
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traf-
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, fic, on short trips and in hilly areas.
depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G
conditions. Drinking and driving
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
structing the pedal’s range of movement.
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- Warning! G Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
tion pressures. cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
and driving are a very dangerous combina- have sufficient clearance.
앫 Remove carriers* when not in use. tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or During sudden driving or braking maneu-
앫 Remove the basic cross bars* when drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions vers, the objects could get caught between
not in use. and judgment. the pedals. You could then no longer brake
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low The possibility of a serious or even fatal or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
load use. accident are greatly increased when you and injury.
drink or take drugs and drive.
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
앫 Have all maintenance work performed taking drugs.
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the Maintenance System. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
349
Operation
Driving instructions
350
Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly be the reason for low brake fluid in the Warning! G
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the reservoir.
vehicle with considerable force prior to If other than recommended brake pads are
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may installed, or other than recommended brake
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the fluid is used, the braking properties of the
the brakes.
instrument cluster comes on and an vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
If your brake system is normally only sub- acoustic warning sounds although the safe braking is substantially impaired. This
jected to moderate loads, you should occa- parking brake is released (컄 page 437). could result in an accident.
sionally test the effectiveness of the Observe additional messages in the multi-
brakes by applying above-normal braking function display that may appear
pressure at higher speeds. This will also (컄 page 472). ! When driving down long and steep grades,
enhance the grip of the brake pads. relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
Have the brake system inspected lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
immediately. Contact an authorized This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. reduces brake pad wear.
All checks and service work on the brake When using the engine’s braking power, a drive
Make sure not to endanger any other road wheel may not spin for an extended period of
system should be carried out by qualified
users when carrying out these braking time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may
technicians only. Contact an authorized cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
maneuvers.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Only install brake pads and brake fluid Warranty.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
System (BAS) (컄 page 105).
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
351
Operation
Driving instructions
352
Operation
Driving instructions
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by Specified tire inflation pressures must be
앫 Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch law. These indicators are located in six maintained. This applies particularly if the
position 0 and remove, or press places on the tread circumference and tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button. become visible at a tread depth of speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which atures).
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle point the tire is considered worn and
when leaving. should be replaced.
Warning! G
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
Tires band across the tread. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
353
Operation
Driving instructions
354
Operation
Driving instructions
355
Operation
Driving instructions
356
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning! G Sand, dirt, mud and other material having Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char-
acteristics and gear changing before you
friction property can cause exceptional wear
and tear as well as brake failure. attempt any difficult terrain off-road driv-
Do not load items on the basic cross bars*.
ing. We recommend that you start out with
It may cause instability during some maneu- Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up easy off-road travel.
vers which could result in an accident. and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will full braking power may not be available in an
make it easier to recognize unexpected ob- emergency.
stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi- Warning! G
cle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear. Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises. There-
Do not drive along the side of a slope. The fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is
vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing as low as possible. With higher ride height
so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity situations.
(straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
use only the service brake. For information
on driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”
(컄 page 361).
357
Operation
Driving instructions
Special driving features for off-road Off-road driving rules ! Observe the following during off-road
driving driving:
앫 Engage the off-road driving program
The following driving features are available (컄 page 279) or LOW RANGE mode* 앫 Keep doors, tailgate, windows, and
for specific kind of operation: (컄 page 203) before driving under tilt/sliding sunroof* closed whenever driving
off-road.
off-road conditions.
앫 Off-road – ABS (컄 page 104) 앫 Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain.
앫 If necessary, activate differential The more uneven, rutty and steeper the ter-
앫 Off-road – ESP® (컄 page 108)
locks* (컄 page 206). rain, the lower the speed should be. Drive
앫 Off-road – 4-ETS (컄 page 110) through water slowly at an even speed,
앫 Make sure you select a vehicle level
avoiding a bow wave.
앫 Hill start assist system (컄 page 199) (컄 page 281) appropriate to the topo-
앫 Be especially careful when driving in un-
앫 LOW RANGE mode* (컄 page 203) graphical conditions. Always make
known territory. It may be necessary to get
sure the vehicle has enough ground out of the vehicle and scout the path you in-
앫 Differential locks* (컄 page 206) clearance. tend to take.
앫 Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) 앫 Fasten items being carried as securely 앫 Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks,
(컄 page 275) as possible (컄 page 297). holes, tree stumps and ruts.
앫 Off-road driving program (Vehicles 앫 Before driving through water, determine its
앫 Always navigate gradients with the en-
without enhanced off-road package*) depth.
gine on and with the transmission en-
(컄 page 279) gaged in a gear. Switch on the DSR 앫 Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water,
(컄 page 276) to help maintain a preset and do not shut off the engine.
앫 Air suspension (컄 page 280)
speed.
358
Operation
Driving instructions
앫 In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as al- Checklist before off-road driving Tires
lowed by conditions. This helps overcome
the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces 앫 Check the tread depth and maintain
Engine oil level
the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the specified tire inflation pressure
ground. 앫 Check the engine oil level with the oil (a placard with the recommended tire
앫 Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It dipstick (컄 page 381). inflation pressures is located on the
interrupts the forward momentum of the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 389)).
Only with a proper oil level can the
vehicle.
vehicle obtain a trouble-free oil supply, 앫 Check tires for possible damage and
앫 Always drive onto slopes with the engine even on steep gradients. remove foreign objects.
running and the vehicle in gear.
! If the engine oil level warning lamp 앫 Replace missing valve caps.
앫 Do not shift automatic transmission to
position N. (컄 page 476) comes on while driving, stop the
vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to Rims
do so. Check the engine oil level (컄 page 381).
Warning! G The engine oil level warnings should not be
앫 Dented or bent rims can cause tire in-
flation pressure loss and damage the
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure displayed could result in serious engine damage tire beads. For this reason, check and,
before driving through sand. However, if you that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz if necessary, change rims before driv-
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation Limited Warranty. ing off-road.
pressure (컄 page 396) before continuing
your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation Vehicle tool kit
pressure increases the risk of losing control 앫 Check if the vehicle jack (컄 page 497)
of the vehicle and rolling over. is functional.
앫 In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on
sandy soil) with you.
359
Operation
Driving instructions
360
Operation
Driving instructions
i The hill start assist system supports you i Vehicles with enhanced off-road package* Driving downhill
when driving uphill. are equipped with automatic locks for the center
앫 Drive slowly.
For more information, see “Hill start assist sys- and rear axle differential to improve vehicle
tem” (컄 page 199). traction. 앫 Do not drive at an angle to the incline.
Steer into the line of gravity and drive
Traction in steep terrain Driving across a hilltop with the front wheels pointing straight
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not downhill. Otherwise, the vehicle may
The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a slide sideways off the path and roll
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope shift automatic transmission to
position N), to prevent the vehicle from over.
angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the
climbing ability of the vehicle depends on speeding up too much after climbing a hill. 앫 Shift automatic transmission to
terrain conditions. Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive position 1 (컄 page 200).
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for across the hilltop. 앫 On steep inclines, use the Downhill
continuous wheel traction when driving in After climbing a hill, driving in this manner Speed Regulation (컄 page 275).
steep terrain. prevents the vehicle from: 앫 Utilize the engine’s braking power to
reduce vehicle speed.
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out on 앫 losing ground contact when cresting
a steep incline when the front wheels have then hills If this is insufficient, apply the brake
the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving
towards the rear axle. 앫 losing its forward momentum
in the line of gravity.
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the 앫 speeding up too much after climbing
torque for the front wheels by braking them. 앫 Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
the hill
Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is grade drive.
increased.
361
Operation
Driving instructions
i The special Off-road – ABS (컄 page 104) 앫 Select the highest vehicle level
Vehicles with air 1
setting allows for precise and brief (cyclical) suspension possible (컄 page 281).
blocking of the front wheels, permitting them to
package 앫 Switch to off-road driving program
dig into loose ground.
Raised level 20.00 in (50 cm) (컄 page 279) or LOW RANGE mode*
Remember that, when stopped, the front wheels
(컄 page 203) before driving through
slide across a surface and thus lose their ability
to steer the vehicle. water.
Vehicles with 1
enhanced off-road 앫 Shift automatic transmission to
Driving through water position 1 or 2 (컄 page 200).
package*
Off-road 3 level 23.60 in (60 cm) 앫 Avoid high engine speeds.
Off-road 2 level 20.00 in (50 cm) 앫 Enter and leave the water only at a
shallow spot, driving at walking speed.
Off-road 1 level 20.00 in (50 cm)
! Never accelerate before driving into the
앫 Before driving through water, deter- water. The bow wave could force water into the
mine its depth. engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging
them.
! The water depth must not exceed the 앫 Drive through the water slowly and at a
respective value listed in the table. The ground
under the water might not be firm which could constant speed.
1 Fording depth
result the water being deeper than expected
when driving the vehicle through it. Please note
that the water level is correspondingly lower for
flowing water.
362
Operation
Driving instructions
앫 Do not stop vehicle while immersed in Crossing obstacles When driving over tree stumps, big rocks
water, and do not shut off the engine. and other obstacles, observe the following
rules:
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors while
driving through water. Water could otherwise en- 앫 Make sure the off-road driving program
ter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle’s (컄 page 279) or if equipped the LOW
electronics, as well as the interior equipment. RANGE mode* (컄 page 203) is
앫 There is a very high level of driving re- switched on.
sistance in water. The surface is slip- 앫 Avoid high engine speeds.
pery and may not be firm, making
앫 Shift automatic transmission to
pulling away in water difficult and dan-
gerous. position 1 (컄 page 200).
! Obstacles can damage the vehicle 앫 Check the vehicle clearance before
앫 Make sure that only small bow waves underbody or suspension components. If possi-
are formed when driving the vehicle ble use the assistance of a second person out- crossing obstacles.
through water. side the vehicle to scout the path you intend to 앫 Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or
take and check for adequate ground clearance
앫 Clean mud off the tire tread after driv- big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of
when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The
ing through water. person assisting you outside the vehicle should the front wheels at the center of the ob-
always be a safe distance away from the vehicle stacle, and repeat same with the rear
앫 To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt wheel.
brake pedal several times while driving in case of any unexpected vehicle movement.
after leaving the water. ! Special attention is needed when you cross
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, in- obstacles on a steep incline.
spect vehicle for any damage, especially vehicle
underbody and suspension components. Failure The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its
to do so can adversely affect the vehicle’s future possible slanted position which in turn may
performance, including increased chance of an result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over.
accident.
363
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving on sand 앫 In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
conditions permit. This helps overcome your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient. Otherwise:
Warning! G the vehicle rolling resistance and re-
duce the likelihood of the vehicle sink-
앫 your vehicle may be damaged
앫 the underbody of the vehicle may come in
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure ing into the ground. contact with the ground and you may get
before driving through sand. However, if you 앫 Drive in tracks of other vehicles if they stuck
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation are not too deep and you have suffi- 앫 Avoid high engine speeds.
pressure (컄 page 396) before continuing cient clearance.
your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation 앫 Shift automatic transmission to
pressure increases the risk of losing control Ruts position 1 (컄 page 200).
of the vehicle and rolling over. 앫 Drive next to the ruts rather than
A number of off-road tracks or other by-
ways have deep ruts which can cause the through them if at all possible.
When driving on sand, observe the follow- underbody to come in contact with the 앫 If the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive
ing rules: ground. with one side of the vehicle on the
앫 Set the raised level (컄 page 281). 앫 Make sure the off-road driving program grassy center strip if the route permits.
앫 Avoid high engine speeds. (컄 page 279), or if equipped, the LOW
RANGE mode* (컄 page 203) is
앫 Shift automatic transmission into a switched on.
gear range that is appropriate for the
terrain. 앫 Set the raised level (컄 page 281).
364
Operation
Driving instructions
Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the 앫 Clean the front and rear license plate.
vehicle.
앫 Remove excessive dirt from tires,
Warning! G We recommend that you inspect the vehi- wheels, wheel housings, and under-
cle for possible damage after each off-road body.
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse-
For instance, after driving in mud, clean
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- quent timely repair reduces the chance of
the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, a possible breakdown or accident later on.
and wheels from extreme dirt using a
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
Proceed as follows: strong jet of water.
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from 앫 Switch off the off-road driving program 앫 Check tires for possible damage.
the roadway. (컄 page 280) or the LOW RANGE
앫 Inspect vehicle underbody, oil pan,
mode* (컄 page 203).
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for brake hoses, etc., as well as vehicle un-
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap- 앫 Switch off the DSR (컄 page 276). derbody for possible damage.
pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
앫 Set the differential locks* to AUTO 앫 Check for brush or branches caught in
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
(컄 page 207). the underbody.
dealer for repairs.
앫 Lower the vehicle back to a level ! Brush or branches could increase the possi-
Damage to the vehicle may influence driving
suitable for road conditions, e.g. High- bility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake
comfort and pose the risk of accident to you
way/High-speed level (컄 page 281). lines, puncture rubber bellows of the axles or
and other drivers. drive shafts.
앫 Clean all exterior lamps and check for
possible damage. 앫 After continued operation in mud,
sand, water or other dirty conditions
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
pads and check and clean axle joints.
앫 Conduct a brake test.
365
Operation
Driving instructions
366
Operation
Driving instructions
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the Loading a trailer Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
maximum permissible axle weight:
앫 When loading a trailer, you should ob- 앫 To assure that the tow vehicle and trail-
serve that neither the permissible GTW, er are in compliance with the maximum
GL 320 CDI
nor the GVWR are exceeded. permissible weight limits have the load-
Front 3306 lb (1500 kg) ed rig (tow vehicle including driver, pas-
Maximum permissible values are listed
Rear 3968 lb (1800 kg) sengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
on the safety compliance certification
weighed on a commercial scale.
labels for the vehicle and for the trailer
GL 450 to be towed. 앫 Check the vehicle’s front and rear
The lowest value listed must be select- Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the Gross
Front 3240 lb (1470 kg)
ed when determining how the vehicle Trailer Weight (GTW) and Tongue
Rear 3968 lb (1800 kg) and trailer are loaded. Weight (TW).
앫 The tongue weight at the hitch ball The values as measures must not
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the must be added to the GVW to prevent exceed the weight limits listed under
weight of the trailer plus the weight of all exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow “Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings”
cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on vehicle’s rear GAWR. (컄 page 366).
the trailer. The maximum permissible
gross trailer weight to be towed: i We recommend loading the trailer in such a
7500 lb (3402 kg). manner that it has a Tongue Weight (TW)
between 8% and 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the (GTW).
maximum permissible weight on the trailer
tongue: i Maximum trailer weight ratings are calculat-
ed assuming the vehicle, plus driver. The weight
600 lb (272 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz
of other accessories, passengers and cargo will
approved hitch receiver. reduce the maximum trailer weight and Tongue
Weight (TW) your vehicle can tow.
367
Operation
Driving instructions
Attaching a trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer ! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if
dimensions (width and length). trailer is so equipped) directly to the vehicle’s
G
hydraulic brake system, as your vehicle is
Warning! Most states and all Canadian provinces equipped with antilock brakes. If you do, neither
require the vehicle’s brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will
While you are coupling or decoupling a trail- function properly.
앫 safety chains between your tow vehicle
er, make sure that you do not
and the trailer. i The provided vehicle electrical connector for
앫 lock or unlock trailer towing has a brake signal wire for hook-up
The chains should be criss-crossed
앫 open or close under the trailer tongue. They must be to a brake controller.
a vehicle door or the tailgate. attached to the hitch receiver, and not You should consider using a trailer sway control
The vehicle’s level could change and you to the vehicle’s bumper or axle. system. For further information, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
Make sure to leave enough slack in the
result. 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
chains to permit turning corners.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS is set to P (컄 page 194).
앫 a separate brake system at various
button* (컄 page 281) or the vehicle level 왘 Set the parking brake for the vehicle
trailer weights.
control system (컄 page 281) when cou- (컄 page 68).
pling/decoupling the trailer. 앫 a break-away switch on trailers with a
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 57).
separate brake system. Check with
your local state laws for specific 왘 Set the vehicle level to Highway
requirements. (컄 page 281).
The switch activates the trailer brakes 왘 Vehicle with ADS*: Set the ADS* to
in the possible event that the trailer AUTO or COMFORT (컄 page 280).
might separate from the tow vehicle. 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 69).
368
Operation
Driving instructions
왘 Close all doors and the tailgate. Note the following points, when driving 앫 Always secure items in the trailer to
with the trailer: prevent load shifts while driving.
왘 Attach the trailer.
앫 In order to gain skill and an understand- 앫 When towing a trailer, check occasion-
왘 Plug in all electrical connectors.
ing of the vehicle’s behavior, you ally to make sure the load is secure,
i When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle should practice turning, stopping and and that lighting and trailer brakes (if
level always remains in the Highway setting. backing up in an area which is free from so equipped) are functioning properly.
The following applies additionally when towing a traffic.
앫 Take into consideration that when tow-
trailer:
앫 Before you start driving check the ing a trailer, the handling characteris-
앫 The vehicle is lowered to the highway level tics are different and less stable from
when it reaches a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) 앫 trailer hitch
those when operating the vehicle with-
if not set to highway level. 앫 break-away switch out a trailer.
앫 The high-speed level is not available.
앫 safety chains It is important to avoid sudden maneu-
The restrictions that apply to towing also apply
when using accessories that are connected to 앫 electrical connections vers.
the trailer power socket, such as a bicycle rack. 앫 The vehicle and trailer combination is
앫 lighting and tires
heavier, and therefore is limited in ac-
Towing a trailer 앫 Adjust the mirrors (컄 page 52) to celeration and climbing ability, and re-
permit unobstructed view beyond rear quires longer stopping distances.
There are many different laws, including
of trailer.
speed limit restrictions, having to do with It is more prone to reacting to cross
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be le- 앫 If the trailer has electric brakes, start wind gusts, and requires more sensi-
gal, not only for where you reside, but also your vehicle and trailer moving slowly, tive steering input.
for where you will be driving. A good and then apply only the trailer brake
controller by hand to make sure the 앫 If possible, do not brake abruptly, but
source for this information can be the po-
brakes are working properly. rather engage the brake slightly at first
lice or local authorities.
to permit the trailer to activate its
brake. Then increase the braking force.
369
Operation
Driving instructions
! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce 앫 If the engine coolant rises to an ex- Uncoupling the trailer
the vehicle’s speed immediately. tremely high temperature (coolant tem-
In no case attempt to straighten out the tow perature needle approaching the red
zone) when the air conditioning is on,
Warning! G
vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.
turn off the air conditioning system. While you are coupling or decoupling a trail-
앫 If the transmission repeatedly shifts
between gears on inclines, manually Engine coolant heat can be additionally er, make sure that you do not
shift to a lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1) vented by opening the windows, 앫 lock or unlock
(컄 page 200). switching the climate control fan speed
앫 open or close
to high and setting the temperature
A lower gear and reduction of speed re- a vehicle door or the tailgate.
control to the maximum hot position.
duces the chance of engine overload- The vehicle’s level could change and you
ing and/or overheating. 앫 Extreme care must be exercised since could endanger yourself and/or others as a
your vehicle with a trailer will require result.
앫 On very steep inclines, not manageable
additional passing distance ahead than
with automatic transmission in 1, Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
when driving without a trailer.
switch on off-road driving program button* (컄 page 281) or the vehicle level
(컄 page 280) or LOW RANGE mode* Because your vehicle and trailer is control system (컄 page 281) when cou-
(컄 page 203). longer than your vehicle alone, you will pling/decoupling the trailer.
also need to go much farther ahead of
앫 When going down a long hill, shift into
the passed vehicle before you can re-
a lower gear and use the engine’s brak-
turn to your lane.
ing effect.
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheat-
ing the vehicle and trailer brakes.
370
Operation
Driving instructions
371
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving abroad Control and operation of radio Telephones and two-way radios
transmitters
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Warning! G
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas COMAND system, radio and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
which are not listed in the index of your
G
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center Warning!
out being connected to an external antenna)
directory, you should request pertinent
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
information from an authorized Do not forget that your primary responsibili-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ty is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
COMAND system, radio or telephone1 if
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
personal injury.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
telephone or a citizens band unit should
ly 14 m) every second.
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
1 Observe all legal requirements. connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
372
Operation
Driving instructions
373
Operation
Driving instructions
374
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling i In case the central locking system does not
Warning! G release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler flap”
(컄 page 501).
Warning! G Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flamma- fuel system and engine could be damaged.
ble and poisonous. They burn violently and In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
can cause serious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- ! Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with
rials near gasoline or diesel fuel! diesel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel ! Diesel engine: When filling the diesel fuel
tank using fuel containers, place a filling filter, a
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth-
suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. 왘 Turn off the engine
ing contact, extinguish all smoking materi- Otherwise, particles from the fuel container
als. could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel injec- 앫 by turning the SmartKey to
Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel tion system. position 0 (컄 page 42). Remove the
fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel
SmartKey from the starter switch.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
fuel vapors are damaging to your health. right-hand side of the vehicle towards the 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with start/stop button (컄 page 43).
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with Open the driver’s door (with the
KEYLESS-GO* automatically driver’s door open, starter switch is
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap. now in position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch). 컄컄
375
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄왘 Briefly push on fuel filler flap at the po- i Gasoline engine:
sition indicated by the arrow. Warning! G Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a min-
imum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
The fuel filler flap opens slightly. Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres- 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
왘 Open the fuel filler flap completely. sure in the system which could cause a gas quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray Please contact gas station personnel in case
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on labels on the pump cannot be found.
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
to it until possible pressure is released. For more information on gasoline, see “Premium
zle, which could cause personal injury.
왘 Take off the fuel cap. unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)”
(컄 page 563), see “Fuel requirements”
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler 왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it (컄 page 563), and the Factory Approved Service
neck. Do not drop the cap. It could damage the clockwise until it audibly engages. Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an
vehicle paint finish. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before
왘 To prevent fuel vapors from escaping locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin i Diesel engine:
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle prevents closing after you have locked the Only use commercially available vehicular
unit. vehicle. ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Information on
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle 왘 Close the fuel filler flap. diesel quality can normally be found on the fuel
unit cuts out – do not top off or over- You should hear the latch close shut. pump. Please contact gas station personnel in
fill. case labels on the pump cannot be found.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap For more information on diesel fuels, refer to the
open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
warning lamp to flash and the ? malfunction (USA only) or contact an authorized
indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunc- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
tion indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 439).
376
Operation
At the gas station
i Diesel engine: Low outside temperatures Check regularly and before a long trip
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank is (diesel engine)
empty, the fuel system needs to be bled 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 379).
(컄 page 529). To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is of-
! Diesel engine: fered in the winter months. Check with
The engine is more susceptible to wear and your fuel retailer.
damage if you use
앫 marine diesel fuel ! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
앫 heating oil fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam-
앫 additives aged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be
seriously damaged if you use
앫 LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL Example GL 450 (GL 320 CDI similar)
(500 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) 1 Brake fluid
앫 any other diesel fuel with a sulfur content of 2 Coolant level
above 15 ppm 3 Windshield washer system and
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or headlamp cleaning system*
special additives is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 381).
377
Operation
At the gas station
For more information, see “Coolant level” For more information, see “Exterior lamp
(컄 page 382) and see “Fuels, coolants, lu- switch” (컄 page 145).
bricants” (컄 page 560).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 396).
378
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood
Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G You could be injured when the hood is open Vehicles with gasoline engine:
– even when the engine is turned off. The engine is equipped with a transistorized
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- Parts of the engine can become very hot. To ignition system. Because of the high voltage
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could prevent burns, let the engine cool off com- it is dangerous to touch any components
be forced open by passing air flow. pletely before touching any components on (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos-
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety tic socket) of the ignition system
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others. precautions. 앫 with the engine running
앫 while starting the engine
Opening 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
Warning! G turned manually
Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
379
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 Closing
앫 with the engine running
앫 while starting the engine
앫 when the ignition is switched on
Warning! G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
The hood lock release lever is located in not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
the driver’s footwell. you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure that the hood is securely en-
gaged before driving off. Do not continue
driving if the hood can no longer engage af-
2 Handle for opening the hood
ter an accident, for example. The hood could
왘 Press and hold handle 2. otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
The hood is unlocked. motion and endanger you and others.
380
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil Checking engine oil level with the oil 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 379).
dipstick
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1.
The amount of oil your engine needs will
When checking the oil level
depend on a number of factors, including 왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
driving style. Increased oil consumption 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level 왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
can occur when ground dipstick guide tube.
앫 the vehicle is new 앫 the vehicle must have been stationary
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
for at least 5 minutes with the engine
앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at approximately 3 seconds to obtain
turned off
higher engine speeds accurate reading.
Engine oil consumption checks should only The oil level is correct when it is be-
be made after the vehicle break-in period. tween lower mark 3 (min.) and upper
mark 2 (max.) of the oil dipstick.
i Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. i The filling quantity between the upper and
Using special additives not approved by lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 If necessary, add engine oil
More information on this subject is available at
(컄 page 382).
any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Example GL 450 (GL 320 CDI similar) For more information on engine oil, see
1 Oil dipstick “Technical data” section (컄 page 560) and
2 Upper mark (컄 page 562).
3 Lower mark
381
Operation
Engine compartment
382
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx-
Warning! G the driver’s side of the engine compart- imately one half turn counterclockwise
ment. to release any excess pressure.
In order to avoid potentially serious burns:
왘 Continue turning cap 1 counterclock-
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the wise and remove it.
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, Coolant level 4 is correct if the level:
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
앫 for cold coolant: reaches the top of
cates that the coolant is overheated.
indicator wall 3 visible through the
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant filling opening
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to 앫 for warm coolant: is approximately
cool down before removing cap. The 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
1 Cap 왘 Add coolant as required.
is under pressure.
2 Coolant expansion tank 왘 Replace and tighten cap 1.
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- 3 Indicator wall
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres- 4 Coolant level For more information on coolant, see
sure. If opened immediately, scalding “Coolants” (컄 page 565).
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
383
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield/rear window washer During all seasons, add MB Windshield ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
system and headlamp cleaning Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
system* water. Premix the windshield washer fluid damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
in a suitable container. For more information, see “Windshield
The windshield washer reservoir is located
washer system and headlamp cleaning
in the engine compartment.
Warning! G system*” (컄 page 567).
384
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Important guidelines
Light Truck Center for information on test- Warning! G
ed and recommended rims and tires for 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
summer and winter operation. They can Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
also offer advice concerning tire service tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
and purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. Contact an authorized Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss or
ther information. If incorrectly sized rims damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads.
and tires are mounted: treads. The operating safety of the vehicle 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as
components can be damaged. required.
앫 The operating clearance of the wheels 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
385
Operation
Tires and wheels
386
Operation
Tires and wheels
387
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle 2) The certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- Two labels on your vehicle show how much the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
mance. To benefit, however, you must Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
1) The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
placard can be found on the driver’s
specified. fuel and cargo. The certification label
door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number also tells you about the front and rear
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and axle weight capacity, called the Gross
the tire. the total weight that can be carried in Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
the vehicle. It also contains information is the total allowable weight that can be
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended carried by a single axle (front or rear).
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi- Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle. either the front axle or rear axle.
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
388
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or 1 Load limit information on the Tire and
brake failure. Loading Information placard
The Tire and Loading Information placard
Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is
located on the driver’s door B-pillar
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information (컄 page 389).
placard example are for illustration purposes
1 Driver’s door B-pillar only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle 왘 Locate the statement “The combined
and may vary from data shown in the illustration weight of occupants and cargo should
Following is a discussion on how to work below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information never exceed XXX kilograms or
with the information contained on the Tire placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your XXX lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
and Loading Information placard with vehicle.
mation placard.
regards to loading your vehicle.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
389
Operation
Tires and wheels
390
Operation
Tires and wheels
391
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
of occu- (driver and tion occupants placard minus combined weight of
pants and passengers) all occupants)
cargo from
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3 1500 lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
392
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects
(컄 page 393) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
GVWR.
(컄 page 393) as to not exceed the permis- trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for ei- between 8% and 15% of the trailer weight
To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
ther the front or rear axle. You can obtain and everything loaded in it.
ceed the maximum permissible weight
the GVWR and GAWR from the certification
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear For more information on trailer tongue
label. The certification label can be found
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including load, see “Loading a trailer” (컄 page 367).
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if
data” (컄 page 547).
applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on
a suitable commercial scale.
393
Operation
Tires and wheels
394
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information Important notes on tire inflation If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
placard example are for illustration purposes pressure inflation pressure label on the inside of the
only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and fuel filler flap, contact an authorized
may vary from data shown in the illustration
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
proper tire inflation pressure.
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle. If the tire inflation pressure drops i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
repeatedly: tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified
앫 Check the tires for punctures from
on the tire inflation pressure label located on the
foreign objects.
inside of the fuel filler flap.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
1 Tire and Loading Information placard loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
with recommended cold tire inflation cle condition. If such information is provid-
where it is legal and conditions allow,
pressures ed, it can be found on the tire inflation
consult the tire inflation pressure label on
pressure label located on the inside of the
The Tire and Loading Information placard the inside of the fuel filler flap (if available)
fuel filler flap (컄 page 375).
lists the recommended cold tire inflation on how to adjust the cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle pressure. If you do not adjust the tire infla-
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed tion pressure, excessive heat can build up
apply to the tires installed as original and result in sudden tire failure.
equipment.
395
Operation
Tires and wheels
396
Operation
Tires and wheels
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in- Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Warning! G
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message Tire pressure Check tires,
왘 Install the valve cap. tional speed. This allows the system to de- one or more of your tires is significantly un-
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire. tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. derinflated. You should stop and check your
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat-
see a corresponding warning message in ed on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
the multifunction display. Information placard or, if available, on the
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a tire inflation pressure label. Driving on a sig-
restricted manner or with a delay nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un-
앫 if snow chains are mounted to the
derinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
vehicle
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
앫 in presence of ice and snow handling and stopping ability. Each tire, in-
앫 if you are driving on a loose surface cluding the spare, should be checked
(e.g. sand or gravel) monthly when cold and set to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure as specified
앫 if you are driving in a very sporty man- on the Tire and Loading Information placard
ner (involving rapid acceleration or high on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 389) or,
speeds in curves) if available, on the tire inflation pressure la-
bel located on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(컄 page 375).
397
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor must be Make sure the standard display menu
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a reactivated in the following situations: appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 157).
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres- pressure 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
sure according to the Tire and Loading until the following message appears in
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
Information placard on the driver’s door the multifunction display:
B-pillar (컄 page 389) or, if available, on the 앫 If you have installed new wheels or
tire inflation pressure label located on the tires
inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 375). 왘 Using the Tire and Loading Information
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or,
regular checks of the tire inflation pressures if available, the tire inflation pressure
since a gradual pressure loss in more than label on the inside of the fuel filler flap,
one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat make sure the tire inflation pressure of 왘 Press the reset button on the instru-
Indicator. all four tires is correct. ment cluster (컄 page 155).
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a The following message will appear in
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of Warning! G the multifunction display:
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout Restart
caused by a foreign object). In this case The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in Run Flat Indicator?
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- a reliable manner if you have set the correct Yes
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering tire inflation pressures for each tire. Cancel
maneuvers. If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
the system will monitor the pressure ac-
cording to the incorrect value.
398
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to confirm activation: Checking tire pressure electronically i This device complies with Part 15 of the
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
왘 Press button æ.
System (TPMS), (USA only) two conditions:
The following message will appear in (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
the multifunction display: i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System ence, and
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire
Run Flat Indicator (2) this device must accept any interference
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
restarted instrument cluster (컄 page 27). Depending on received, including interference that may
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire cause undesired operation.
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val- pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS Any unauthorized modification to this device
system itself: could void the user’s authority to operate the
ues for all four tires.
앫 If the telltale illuminates continuously, equipment.
If you wish to cancel activation: one or more of your tires is significantly
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
왘 Press button ç. underinflated. There is no malfunction in the
TPMS. are equipped with the proper electronic
or sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
앫 If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
왘 Wait until the message
itself is not operating properly. tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
Restart
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
Run Flat Indicator?
tires.
Yes
Cancel
disappears.
399
Operation
Tires and wheels
400
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the TPMS i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
of reasons, including the installation of in-
G
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
compatible replacement or alternate tires or Warning! Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
from functioning properly. Always check the It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the (컄 page 389). Some vehicles may have supple-
to ensure that the replacement or alternate ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You mental tire inflation pressure information for
might lose control over the vehicle. driving at high speeds (컄 page 395) or for vehi-
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle
to function properly. condition (컄 page 395). If such information is
The TPMS must be reactivated when you provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc- have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to filler flap.
tion develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for a new level (e.g. because of different load 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
the system to signal a malfunction using the or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
recalibrated to the current tire inflation until the standard display menu ap-
quence.
pressures. pears in the multifunction display
The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv-
ing if the malfunction has been corrected. 왘 Using the Tire and Loading Information (컄 page 157).
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar 왘 Press the j or k button repeat-
i Operating radio transmission equipment (컄 page 389) or, if available, the edly until you see the following
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or supplemental tire inflation pressure
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal- message:
information on the inside of the fuel Tire pressure monitor
function.
filler flap (컄 page 375), make sure the active
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is Menu: R-Button 컄컄
correct.
401
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 155). Checking tire pressure electronically i Possible differences between the readings
with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni- of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas
The following message will appear in
toring System (Advanced TPMS)*, station equipment, and the vehicle’s control
the multifunction display: system can occur. Usually the readings issued by
(Canada only)
Restart tire the control system are more precise.
pressure monitor? i This device complies with RSS-210 of Indus- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42).
try Canada. Operation is subject to the following
왘 Press the æ button.
two conditions: 왘 Press the j or k button on the
The following message will appear in (1) This device may not cause interference, and multifunction steering wheel until the
the multifunction display: current inflation pressures for each tire
(2) this device must accept any interference
Tire pressure monitor received, including interference that may appear in the multifunction display.
restarted cause undesired operation of the device.
After driving a few minutes the system Any unauthorized modification to this device
verifies that the current tire inflation could void the user’s authority to operate the
pressures are within the system’s equipment.
specified range. Afterwards the current The TPMS only functions on wheels that
tire inflation pressures are accepted as are equipped with the proper electronic
reference pressures and then moni- sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
tored.
i When the message Tire pressure
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four displayed after driving for a few
If you wish to cancel activation: tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a minutes appears in the multifunction display,
decrease in pressure in one or more of the the individual inflation pressure values are
왘 Press the ç button. matched with the tires. The individual values are
tires.
displayed after a few minutes driving.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes’ travel time.
402
Operation
Tires and wheels
403
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 Reactivating Advanced TPMS* i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehi- The TPMS must be reactivated when you
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for a new level (e.g. because of different load tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- or driving conditions). The TPMS is then pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire recalibrated to the current tire inflation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
pressure, even if under-inflation has not pressures. (컄 page 389). Some vehicles may have supple-
reached the level to trigger illumination of mental tire inflation pressure information for
driving at high speeds (컄 page 395) or for vehi-
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Warning! G cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition (컄 page 395). If such information is
i Operating radio transmission equipment It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- filler flap.
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal- tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
function.
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
might lose control over the vehicle. until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
왘 Using the Tire and Loading Information (컄 page 157).
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar 왘 Press the j or k button repeat-
(컄 page 389) or, if available, the sup- edly until you see the current inflation
plemental tire inflation pressure pressures for each tire appear in the
information on the inside of the fuel display or the following message ap-
filler flap (컄 page 375), make sure the pears in the display
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
404
Operation
Tires and wheels
405
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed
(컄 page 413) rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
manufacturer name, a number of markings (컄 page 410)
can be found on a tire. 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 412)
Following are some explanations for the 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle’s tires: (컄 page 412)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 415)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 406)
8 Load identification (컄 page 410)
9 Tire name 1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data 3 Radial tire code
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration. 4 Rim diameter
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
5 Tire load rating
(컄 page 554). 6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
406
Operation
Tires and wheels
407
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 406) and Tire
Warning! G rating, see “Load identification” speed rating 6 (컄 page 406) are also referred
(컄 page 410). to as “service description”.
The tire load rating must always be at least
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 406) and Tire Summer tires
half of the GAWR (컄 page 416) of your
vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the speed rating 6 (컄 page 406) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Index Speed rating
result which may cause an accident and/or
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
serious personal injury to you or others.
Tire speed rating R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 406) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
shown on the original part. indicates the approved maximum speed
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
for the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
408
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any If a service description 5 and 6 All-season and winter tires
tire with a speed capability above (컄 page 406) is given, the speed capa-
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a bility is limited by the speed symbol in Index Speed rating
1
“ZR” in the size designation (for exam- the service description. Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. T M+S 1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
maximum speed capability of the tire, In this example, “97Y” is the service 1
the service description for the tire must description. The letter “Y” designates H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
1
be referred to. The service description the speed rating and the speed capabil- V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
is comprised of the tire load rating 5 ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 1 or M+S.for winter tires
(컄 page 406) and the tire speed (300 km/h).
rating 6 (컄 page 406).
앫 Any tire with a speed capability above i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
designation and no service “ZR” in the size designation AND the show M+S and the
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 406) is service description must be placed in mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction
given, the tire manufacturer must be parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
performance requirements of the Rubber Manu-
consulted for the maximum speed ca- (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren- facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
pability. thesis designates the maximum speed Association of Canada (RAC) and have been
capability of the tire as being above designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
409
Operation
Tires and wheels
Load identification In addition to tire load rating, special load DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
identification 1 may be molded into the
tire sidewall following the letter designat- U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
ing the tire speed rating (컄 page 406). manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
No specification given: absence of any text
produced.
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire. The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
purchasers in recall situations or other
(or reinforced) tire.
safety matters concerning tires and gives
Light Load: designates a light load tire. purchasers the means to easily identify
1 Load identification C, D, E: designates load range associated such tires.
with the maximum load a tire can carry at The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data a specified pressure.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
from data shown in above illustration. code” and “Date of manufacture”.
410
Operation
Tires and wheels
411
Operation
Tires and wheels
412
Operation
Tires and wheels
Always follow the recommended tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Quality grades can be found, where appli-
inflation pressure (컄 page 394) for proper (U.S. vehicles) cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
tire inflation. shoulder and maximum section width. For
Tire manufacturers are required to grade example:
tires based on three performance factors:
Warning! G treadwear, traction and Treadwear Traction Temperature
temperature resistance. 200 AA A
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. All passenger car tires must conform to
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires federal safety requirements in addition to
wear excessively and/or unevenly, these grades.
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over-
heated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis- 1 Treadwear
tance, and result in sudden deflation 2 Traction
(blowout) because they are more likely to 3 Temperature resistance
become punctured or damaged by road de-
bris, potholes etc.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
413
Operation
Tires and wheels
414
Operation
Tires and wheels
415
Operation
Tires and wheels
416
Operation
Tires and wheels
417
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply composition and material used Tread Vehicle maximum load on the tire
This indicates the number of plies or the The portion of a tire that comes into Load on an individual tire that is
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in contact with the road. determined by distributing to each axle its
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac- share of the maximum loaded vehicle
turers also must indicate the ply materials Treadwear indicators weight and dividing it by two.
in the tire and sidewall, which include
Narrow bands, sometimes called
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Rotating tires
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
remains.
Warning! G
speed range for which a tire is approved. TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
Maximum permissible weight on trailer of the same dimension.
Total load limit tongue. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
Rated cargo and luggage load plus tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards rear), tire rotation is not possible.
designated seating capacity.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
Traction
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are with tires of the same dimension all
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road determined by tire manufacturers using around. If your vehicle is equipped with
via the tires. The amount of grip provided. government testing procedures. The tires of the same dimension all around,
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tires can be rotated, observing a
tire. front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 388).
418
Operation
Tires and wheels
419
Operation
Winter driving
420
Operation
Winter driving
421
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Starting approximately 1 month before the
your vehicle serviced by an authorized next maintenance service is due, one of
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in the following messages will appear in the
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet multifunction display while you are driving
at the times called for by the maintenance or when you switch on the ignition (exam-
service indicator display. ple service A):
! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A in XXXXX miles (km) Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and Service A in XXX days of maintenance services and intervals they
maintenance service indicator at the designated Service A in X day need to be performed at.
times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not Service A due now
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited i The Maintenance System in your vehicle
Warranty. The maintenance services will be indicated tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
by showing a service type A through type H since the last maintenance service and calcu-
Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display. Types A lates other maintenance service work required.
message through H are classified based on estimat-
ed time needed to perform the mainte-
The maintenance service indicator mes- nance service, ranging:
sage will notify you when the next mainte- from Service A
nance service is due.
(approximately 1 hour)
to Service H
(approximately 8 hours)
422
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service You can also clear it yourself: Maintenance service term exceeded
indicator message
If you have exceeded the suggested main-
The maintenance service indicator mes- tenance service term, you will see the fol-
sage is automatically cleared lowing message in the multifunction
display:
앫 after approximately 10 seconds when
you switch on the ignition or when Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
reaching the maintenance service Service A exceeded by XXX days
threshold while driving Service A exceeded by X day
앫 after approximately 30 seconds, once In addition, a signal sounds when the
the suggested maintenance service message appears.
term has passed 1 Reset button
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
왘 Press reset button 1 on the instru- Center will reset the maintenance service
ment cluster. indicator following a completed mainte-
The maintenance service indicator nance service.
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 164).
423
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service To arrive at the true maintenance service dead- ! If the maintenance service indicator was
indicator display line, you will need to subtract these days from inadvertently reset, have an authorized
the days shown in the maintenance service indi- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center correct it.
You can call up the maintenance service in- cator message or maintenance service indicator
display. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
dicator display at any time to check when been performed. Resetting the system without
the next maintenance service is due. Do not confuse the maintenance service indica- performing the proper service as called for by
tor with the engine oil level indicator N. the maintenance service indicator will result in
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 42). engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- Resetting the maintenance service covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly indicator Warranty.
until the standard display appears in
In the event that the maintenance service
the multifunction display (컄 page 164).
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
왘 Press button k or j until the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
maintenance service indicator display Center, you can have the maintenance
with the service symbol 9 and the service indicator reset. The automotive
service deadline appears in the multi- maintenance facility carrying out the
function display. maintenance service will find the informa-
tion for resetting the maintenance service
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of indicator in the maintenance-relevant
disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator. information for your vehicle. Such informa-
tion is available from either your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
424
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle While in operation, even while parked, your Frequent washing reduces and/or
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- eliminates the aggressiveness and
Regular and proper care will help to fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- potency of the above adverse influences.
maintain the value of your vehicle. The tack the paintwork as well as the
More frequent washings are necessary to
best way to protect your vehicle from underbody and cause lasting damage.
deal with unfavorable conditions:
harmful environmental influences is to
Such damage is caused not only by
wash it and use protective treatments 앫 near the ocean
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
regularly. 앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
but also by:
emissions)
앫
Warning! G Air pollution
앫 during winter operation
앫 Road salt
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. You should check your vehicle from time to
앫 Tar
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. time for stone chipping or other damage.
Always follow the instructions on the partic- 앫 Gravel and stone chipping Any damage should be repaired as soon as
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s To avoid paint damage, you should possible to prevent corrosion.
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. immediately remove: In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
앫 Grease and oil
signed for cleaning your vehicle. ough check is a washing of the underbody
앫 Fuel followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
Always lock away cleaning products and
앫 Coolant aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
keep them out of reach of children.
앫 Brake fluid
앫 Bird droppings
앫 Insects
앫 Tree resins, etc.
425
Operation
Vehicle care
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto- The following topics deal with the cleaning Tar stains
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body and care of your vehicle and give important
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
cavities which will last for the lifetime of “how-to” information as well as references
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
remover is recommended.
neither necessary nor recommended by products.
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
Paintwork, painted body components
of incompatibility between materials used Power washer
in the production process and others ap- ! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar
plied later. ! Follow the instructions provided by the materials to painted body components may
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a damage the paintwork.
We have selected car-care products and distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
compiled recommendations which are the power washer. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
specially matched to our vehicles and Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. should be applied when water drops on the
which always reflect the latest technology. The intense jet of water can result in damage to paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved the tire. normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
car-care products at an authorized Always replace a damaged tire. depending on the climate and washing
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Always keep the jet of water moving across the
detergent used.
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber should be applied if the paint surface
damage due to negligent or incorrect care parts.
cannot always be removed or repaired with shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
the car-care products recommended here. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: gloss).
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
Center.
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
426
Operation
Vehicle care
Do not apply any of these products or wax Vehicle washing 왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the fused jet of water.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
hood is still hot.
of road salt as soon as possible. Direct only a very weak spray towards
왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up the ventilation intake.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
not forget to clean the inner sides of the 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
wheels. sponge and chamois frequently.
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
Engine cleaning If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and dry with a chamois.
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
make sure to protect electrical compo- mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently the finish.
nents and connectors from the intrusion of locked or unlocked.
! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
water and cleaning agents.
Hand-wash Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
Corrosion protection, such as non-sratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
to the engine compartment after every en- in direct sunlight. cloth or sponge.
gine cleaning. Before applying, all control 왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent, Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
linkage bushings and joints should be lu- such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
bricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys Shampoo.
should be protected from any wax.
427
Operation
Vehicle care
Automatic car wash When taking the vehicle through an auto- Vehicles with SmartKey:
matic conveyor type car wash, observe the
You can have your car washed in an auto- 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill and the
following instructions.
matic car wash from the start. Automatic ignition switched on shift the automatic
car washes without brushes are prefera- transmission to neutral position N.
ble. Warning! G 왘 If engaged, release the parking brake
왘 To protect the filter system, switch the (컄 page 60).
When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey
climate control system (컄 page 218) or 왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do
the automatic climate control system* SmartKey in the starter switch.
not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
(컄 page 232) to air recirculation mode.
It is possible for children to switch on the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic ignition which could result in unsupervised
touchless car wash which use caustic spray. use of vehicle equipment. Unsupervised use 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the of vehicle equipment could result in an the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
paint or ornamental moldings. accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 With the ignition switched on shift the
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it automatic transmission to park
before running it through the automatic position P.
car wash.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch 왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
is set to 0 (컄 page 64). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
button from the starter switch
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle (컄 page 43).
damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
428
Operation
Vehicle care
왘 Insert the SmartKey with Ornamental moldings Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch. side markers, turn signal lenses
For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
왘 Switch on the ignition. tal moldings, use a damp cloth. 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
왘 Depress the brake pedal. ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental poo, with plenty of water.
moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
have chrome appearance, they could be made of ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
neutral position N anodized aluminum that will be damaged when suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean-
왘 Release the brake pedal. cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a ing solutions which are not suitable may damage
damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings. the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-
왘 If engaged, release the parking brake
For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
(컄 page 60). are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean- that contain solvents.
왘 Switch off the ignition and leave the er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the chrome-plated, contact an authorized non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
starter switch.
cloth or sponge.
i After running the vehicle through an auto- Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind- surface.
shield (컄 page 431). This will prevent smears
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
residual wax on the windshield.
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may
vibrate.
429
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor 왘 Restart the engine after cleaning sen- ! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
cover sor cover 1. covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system Follow the instructions provided by the power
sensors washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
430
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens* ! Do not clean the camera and the area Cleaning the windows and the wiper
around the camera: blades
앫 with a high-pressure cleaner
앫 with a dry cloth and high pressure Warning! G
앫 with aggressive cleaning agents
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
You could otherwise damage the camera.
move SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
1 Camera lens wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
왘 Only use clean water and a soft, cause injury.
non-scratching cloth to clean the
camera lens 1. 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
Be careful not to apply wax to camera engage.
lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
necessary, remove the wax using the could tear.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
with plenty of water.
clean cloth and detergent solution. 컄컄
431
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- Light alloy wheels Plastic and rubber parts
dow cleaning solution on all outside
If possible, clean wheels once a week. 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
and inside glass surfaces.
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
An automotive glass cleaner is recom- washing solution.
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
mended.
spray of water for cleaning the light al- 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto loy wheels. lukewarm solution.
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid The surface may temporarily change
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*). may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm ! The vehicle should not be parked for an ex-
back. If released, the force of the impact from tended period of time immediately after it has
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims Warning! G
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con- corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
front, rear or side windows and the power the wheel paint if the car is not driven after the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol-
tilt/sliding sunroof* or rear panorama roof with cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system vents will make the surface porous and vehi-
hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. should always be warmed-up before it is parked cle occupants could suffer serious injuries
Doing so may damage the windows. after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle from plastic parts coming loose in the event
for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. of air bag deployment.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
432
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on Steering wheel Seat belts
these parts.
왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor- 왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
Never apply strong force and only use a soft, oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz soap.
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. approved Leather Care.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry ! The seat belts must not be treated with
cloth or sponge. chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
Carpets belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface. 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet direct sunlight.
and Fabric Care for cleaning the car-
Hard plastic trim items pets. Warning! G
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Headliner Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a severely weaken them. In a crash they may
with light pressure.
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of not be able to provide adequate protection.
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, excessive dirt.
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
433
Operation
Vehicle care
434
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine only)
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
435
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: bulb self-check when switching on the
If any of the following lamps in the instru- ignition, have the respective bulb checked
ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary.
436
Practical hints
What to do if …
437
Practical hints
What to do if …
438
Practical hints
What to do if …
439
Practical hints
What to do if …
440
Practical hints
What to do if …
bilize the vehicle if the system recognizes your speed and driving to the prevailing
that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel road and weather conditions.
is spinning. If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunc- 왘 Observe additional messages in the
tion. multifunction display.
Risk of accident! 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
441
Practical hints
What to do if …
442
Practical hints
What to do if …
443
Practical hints
What to do if …
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
front door is opened.
444
Practical hints
What to do if …
445
Practical hints
What to do if …
446
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G overheat and can lead to tire failure. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of in-
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- compatible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked monthly when cold and cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- note that the TPMS is not a substitute for from functioning properly. Always check the
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
Tire and Loading Information placard on the er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
driver’s door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire pressure, even if underinflation has not to ensure that the replacement or alternate
inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. reached the level to trigger illumination of tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
If your vehicle has tires of a different size the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. to function properly.
than the size indicated on the Tire and USA only:
Loading Information placard or, if available, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
the tire inflation pressure label, you should TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
determine the proper tire inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly.
for those tires. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- When the system detects a malfunction, the
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
pressure telltale when one or more of your and then remain continuously illuminated.
tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- This sequence will continue upon subse-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the
minates, you should stop and check your malfunction exists. When the malfunction
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to indicator is illuminated, the system may not
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
ly underinflated tire causes the tire to as intended.
447
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
448
Practical hints
What to do if …
449
Practical hints
What to do if …
450
Practical hints
What to do if …
451
Practical hints
What to do if …
i Switching on the ignition causes all On the pages that follow, you will find a
Warning! G instrument cluster lamps (except high beam compilation of the most important warning
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal and malfunction messages that may
No messages will be displayed if either the indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the appear in the multifunction display.
instrument cluster or the multifunction multifunction display to come on. Make sure the
display is inoperative. lamps and multifunction display are in working For your convenience the messages are
order before starting your journey. divided into two sections:
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such 앫 Text messages (컄 page 453)
as speed or outside temperature, warn- 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 469)
ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
452
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
453
Practical hints
What to do if …
454
Practical hints
What to do if …
455
Practical hints
What to do if …
456
Practical hints
What to do if …
457
Practical hints
What to do if …
458
Practical hints
What to do if …
459
Practical hints
What to do if …
460
Practical hints
What to do if …
461
Practical hints
What to do if …
462
Practical hints
What to do if …
463
Practical hints
What to do if …
464
Practical hints
What to do if …
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind
or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that
an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front
passenger seat.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch
on the ignition (컄 page 42).
(Continued on next page)
465
Practical hints
What to do if …
466
Practical hints
What to do if …
467
Practical hints
What to do if …
468
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
469
Practical hints
What to do if …
470
Practical hints
What to do if …
471
Practical hints
What to do if …
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
472
Practical hints
What to do if …
473
Practical hints
What to do if …
474
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
475
Practical hints
What to do if …
When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
at next refueling (Canada: 1 liter) leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
appears while the engine is running and at service station where the engine oil should
operating temperature, the engine oil level be topped to the required level with an
has dropped to approximately the mini- approved oil.
mum level. For information on approved engine oils,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
When this occurs, the warning will first
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
come on intermittently and then stay on if
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
the oil level drops further.
Center.
476
Practical hints
What to do if …
! The engine oil level warnings should not be that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis- Limited Warranty.
played could result in serious engine damage
477
Practical hints
What to do if …
478
Practical hints
What to do if …
479
Practical hints
What to do if …
480
Practical hints
What to do if …
481
Practical hints
What to do if …
482
Practical hints
What to do if …
483
Practical hints
What to do if …
484
Practical hints
What to do if …
485
Practical hints
What to do if …
486
Practical hints
What to do if …
487
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
488
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
489
Practical hints
What to do if …
490
Practical hints
What to do if …
491
Practical hints
What to do if …
492
Practical hints
What to do if …
493
Practical hints
What to do if …
494
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit
i Check expiration dates and contents for The vehicle tool kit is stored under the
completeness at least once a year and replace cargo compartment floor.
missing/expired items.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s
앫 Towing eye bolt
side in the cargo compartment behind the
cover. 앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Vehicle jack 1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered
앫 Fuse chart 2 Handle cover
495
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
컄컄
496
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
! Vehicles with factory-mounted Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located underneath the
running-boards*: cargo compartment floor.
G
Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type
jack (located under the cargo compartment Warning!
floor) designed for use with factory-mounted
running boards. Only use this jack when jacking The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
damaged. See separate instructions for scis- avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
sors-type jack. the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
! To prevent damage, always disengage the get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
strap of the securing hook and lower the cargo by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
compartment floor (컄 page 495) before closing the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
the tailgate. firmly set parking brake and block wheels Storage position
before raising vehicle with jack. 왘 Remove vehicle jack from its storage
Do not disengage the parking brake while
compartment (컄 page 496).
the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack 왘 Turn crank handle in the direction of ar-
is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, row as far as it will go. 컄컄
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface.
Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated
in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower
the vehicle onto jackstands of sufficient
capacity before working under the vehicle.
497
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Operational position
왘 Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor-
age compartment:
앫 The vehicle jack should be fully col-
lapsed.
앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
498
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel The Minispare wheel is located underneath 왘 Loosen retaining screw 2 by turning it
the cargo compartment floor counterclockwise.
(컄 page 495).
Warning! G i If retaining screw 2 does not come loose,
turn vehicle tool kit storage well casing 3
i For information on how to mount the
Minispare wheel, see “Mounting the spare slightly counterclockwise. Retaining screw 2
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are should then come loose easily.
wheel” (컄 page 524).
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics 왘 Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
Removing Minispare wheel casing 3.
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord- 왘 Remove the jack from the vehicle tool You can now access the Minispare wheel.
ingly. kit (컄 page 496).
왘 Remove Minispare wheel 1.
The Minispare wheel is for temporary use
only. When driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted, ensure proper tire inflation
pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
Minispare wheel replaced with a regular
road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than 1 Minispare wheel
one spare wheel mounted. 2 Retaining screw
Do not switch off the ESP® when a 3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
Minispare wheel is mounted.
499
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door
500
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
501
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
컄컄왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin 왘 Pull red fuel filler flap release 3 in
into the slot of lock 1 (컄 page 501). direction of arrow.
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90° The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
in direction of arrow.
왘 Open the fuel filler flap (컄 page 375).
왘 Remove cover 2 (컄 page 501).
502
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Take crank 2 out of the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
You can open or close the tilt/sliding
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 왘 Insert crank 2 into hole.
sunroof manually should an electrical
(컄 page 70).
malfunction occur. i The hole may be covered by a noise
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts reduction padding. You will then have to push the
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
the starter switch in position 0, same crank through the padding at the perforated
behind a cover on the overhead control mark.
as with the SmartKey removed from
panel.
the starter switch). The driver’s door 왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to
can then be closed again.
앫 slide sunroof closed
왘 Press on cover 1 at the position indi-
앫 raise sunroof at the rear
cated by the arrow.
왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to
왘 Take off cover 1.
앫 slide sunroof open
앫 lower sunroof at the rear
i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized if
1 Cover it has been operated manually (컄 page 255).
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
2 Crank
503
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
504
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왘 Guide reset tool 1 into rectangular 왘 Repeat this procedure on the active
opening 3 of active head restraint 2. head restraint for the second front
seat.
왘 Press reset tool 1 downward in
direction of arrow until you hear the 왘 After resetting the active head
head restraint release mechanism restraints store reset tool 1 in the
audibly disengage. Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
왘 Pull out reset tool 1.
왘 Firmly press the active head restraint For information on active head restraints,
cushion backward towards the head see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 92).
restraint cover in direction of arrow For information on head restraint adjust-
until it engages. ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 45).
505
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the i When inserting the batteries, make sure
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis- they are clean and free of lint.
charged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
have the batteries replaced at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. The required replacement batteries are available
at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
506
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
507
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid- when the following lamps malfunction:
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights 앫 Turn signal lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- on should clear up the fogging.
앫 Brake lamps
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all 앫 Parking lamps
times. 앫 Tail lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely Read and observe the messages in the multi-
important. Have headlamps checked and function display (컄 page 481).
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
headlamp adjustment.
508
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
509
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Warning! G 앫 Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
앫 the additional turn signal lamps in the
Allow the lamp to cool down before chang- 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
ing a bulb. exterior rear view mirrors
to prevent short circuits.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 the high mounted brake lamp
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs. 앫 the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps
A bulb can explode if you: 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 the Bi-Xenon high beam flasher spot-
앫 touch or move it when hot and grease. light*
앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
앫 scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by a an autho-
Wear eye and hand protection. rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
i Replacing the bulbs for the front lamps is a
technically complex process. For your conve-
lamp and its components. We recommend nience, we recommend that you have this work
that you have such work done by a qualified carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
technician. Light Truck Center.
Have the headlamp adjustment checked
regularly.
510
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Low beam bulb (halogen headlamp)
511
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. Bi-Xenon* low beam/high beam High beam bulb (halogen headlamp)
headlamp
왘 Remove cover 1.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise.
Warning! G
왘 Pull bulb socket 2 out of the
headlamp housing. Do not remove the low beam/high beam
왘 Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because
socket 2. of high voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is danger-
ous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
왘 Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb and its components. We recommend that
socket 2. you have such work done by a qualified
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the technician. 1 High beam headlamp cover
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-
es.
512
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. Turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘 Remove cover 1. 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 (컄 page 511)
counterclockwise.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise.
왘 Pull bulb socket 3 out of the
왘 Pull bulb socket 2 out of the
headlamp housing. headlamp housing.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.
왘 Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb
socket 2. 왘 Insert the new bulb into bulb
socket 3.
왘 Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb
socket 2. 왘 Insert bulb socket 3 into the
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp headlamp housing.
headlamp housing. 왘 Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise. 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it 왘 Pull bulb socket 1 out of the
engages. headlamp housing.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the 왘 Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
headlamp housing. socket 1.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag- 왘 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
es. socket 1.
왘 Insert bulb socket 1 into the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 1 clockwise until it
engages.
513
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb Front fog lamp bulbs 왘 Insert a suitable object (e.g. screwdriv-
er) at point indicated by the arrow and
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 (컄 page 511) ! If not done carefully and properly, damage pry out cover 1.
counterclockwise. to the bumper can result. We therefore recom-
mend that you have this work carried out by an Cover 1 is released.
왘 Pull bulb socket 5 out of the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
headlamp housing. 왘 Swing cover 1 outwards and take it
Removing front fog lamp cover: off.
왘 Pull the side marker bulb out of bulb
socket 5. You can now access the front fog lamp.
왘 Insert the new side marker bulb into
bulb socket 5.
왘 Insert bulb socket 5 into the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it
engages.
1 Cover
2 Front fog lamp or corner-illuminating
front fog lamp* 3 Retaining screws
왘 Turn retaining screws 3 counterclock-
wise.
왘 Remove front fog lamp 2 out of the
bumper.
왘 Pull electrical connector off.
514
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
engages.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
왘 Plug in the electrical connector.
lamp, do the following first:
왘 Insert front fog lamp 2 back into
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
bumper.
position M (컄 page 145).
왘 Fasten retaining screws 3.
왘 Reinsert cover 1 and press it in until it Tail lamp unit
engages. i To access the bulb socket, you have to
4 Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb remove the cover in the corresponding side trim
Additional turn signal lamps bulbs panel of the cargo compartment.
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise.
The additional turn signal lamps in the 왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 124).
왘 Pull bulb socket 4 out of the housing. exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘 Pull the front fog lamp bulb out of bulb If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-
socket 4. tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
왘 Insert the new front fog lamp bulb into placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
bulb socket 4. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
왘 Insert bulb socket 4 into the housing.
515
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the side trim panels Opening the passenger side trim panel:
Opening the driver’s side trim panel:
1 Lock
2 Storage compartment 1 Lock
2 Cover in right side trim panel
1 Lock 왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin
2 Cover in left side trim panel into the slot of lock 1. 왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin
왘 Turn lock 1 90° in direction of arrow. 왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90° into the slot of lock 1.
in direction of arrow. 왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°
왘 Fold down cover 2.
in direction of arrow.
왘 Remove storage compartment 2.
왘 Remove cover 2.
516
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
517
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp Adjusting headlamp aim Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. To check and readjust a head-
lamp, follow the steps described:
왘 Park the vehicle on a level surface
25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test
screen or wall.
왘 Switch the headlamps on
(컄 page 145).
If the beam does not show a beam pattern
as indicated in the figure left, then follow
1 License plate lamp cover the steps below:
V Vertical centerline
2 Screws
H Headlamp mounting height, measured 왘 Open hood (컄 page 379).
왘 Loosen screws 2. from the center
왘 Remove license plate lamp cover 1. i High beam adjustments simultaneously aim
왘 Replace the tubular bulb. the low beam.
Vehicle should have a normal tailgate load.
왘 Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1.
왘 Retighten screws 2.
518
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
519
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Front wiper blades ! Never open the hood when the wiper arms 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
are folded forward. engage.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
Warning! G back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
Make sure the wiper blades are properly
vehicle’s on-board electronics have installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. cause windshield damage.
Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
For your convenience, we recommend that you
and cause injury. have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 1 Wiper blade
2 Cover
Warning! G Removing 3 Attachment
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 4 Tab
Wiper blades are components that are sub- 5 Removing
switch.
ject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Press tabs 4 together and tilt wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
blade 1 to detach tabs 4 on both
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board recesses of attachment 3.
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be electronics have status 0
able to observe surrounding traffic condi- (컄 page 44). Wiper blade 1 is released on one end.
tions and could cause an accident.
왘 Maintaining its tilted position, slide
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear. wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3 in
direction of arrow 5.
520
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing 왘 Check if the wiper blade is securely ! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
fastened. arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the rear
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on window.
the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the rear
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm window glass without a wiper blade inserted.
when folding it back. Make sure the wiper blade is properly installed.
Improperly installed wiper blades may cause
Rear wiper blade rear window damage.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
1 Installing Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
2 Tab
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
3 Attachment
remove SmartKey from starter switch
4 Guide tab
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
5 Cover
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
왘 Slide the wiper blade into status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
attachment 3 in direction of Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
arrow 1. and cause injury.
왘 Make sure guide tab 4 will be placed
under cover 5 when fully inserting the
wiper blade into attachment.
왘 Let tab 2 latch into both recesses of
attachment 3.
521
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing 왘 Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper
angle with wiper arm 1 as shown. blade 2 by pushing it in direction of
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
arrow until it locks into place.
switch. 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage wip-
er blade 2 by carefully sliding it in 왘 Check whether the wiper blade is
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
direction of arrow. securely fastened.
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
왘 Remove wiper blade 2. 왘 Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear
electronics have status 0
(컄 page 44). window.
Installing Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It folding the wiper arm back.
could tear.
왘 Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear
window until it engages.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
왘 Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper
arm 1.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
522
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 41).
Warning! G 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are Warning! G switch.
different from those of the road wheels. As Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics Your vehicle is equipped with air suspen-
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
change when driving with a Minispare wheel sion. Do not open or close any doors or the
KEYLESS-GO* button once
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord- tailgate while mounting a spare wheel. The
(컄 page 70).
ingly. vehicle could rise or lower to a previously se-
lected level. You or others could be injured 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
The Minispare wheel is for temporary use
as a result. the starter switch in position 0,
only. When driving with a Minispare wheel
same as with the SmartKey re-
mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and
moved from the starter switch). The
do not exceed a vehicle speed of 왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
driver’s door then can be closed
50 mph (80 km/h). moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
again.
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light when possible.
왘 Remove the KEYLESS-GO*
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the 왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher
start/stop button from the starter
Minispare wheel replaced with a regular (컄 page 151).
road wheel. switch (컄 page 43).
왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the
Never operate the vehicle with more than 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
front wheels are in a straight-ahead
one spare wheel mounted. a safe distance from the roadway.
position.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a 왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 60). i Open door only when conditions are safe to
Minispare wheel is mounted. do so.
왘 Set the automatic transmission to park
position P (컄 page 194).
523
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel Lifting the vehicle 왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
Preparing the vehicle Warning! G or other sizeable objects.
One collapsible wheel chock is includ-
왘 Prepare the vehicle as described
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking ed with the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 523).
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets (컄 page 495). For information on set-
왘 Take the wheel wrench, the collapsible built into both sides of the vehicle. To help ting up the collapsible wheel chock,
wheel chock, and the vehicle jack out avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift see (컄 page 498).
of the cargo compartment the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
When changing wheel on a level surface:
(컄 page 495). get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from 왘 Place one wheel chock in front of and
왘 Take the Minispare wheel out of the
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always another sizeable object behind the
cargo compartment (컄 page 499).
firmly set parking brake and block wheels wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
! Vehicles with factory-mounted before raising vehicle with jack. wheel being changed.
running-boards*:
Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type Do not disengage parking brake while the Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
jack (located under the cargo compartment vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is on a level surface. However, should
floor) designed for use with factory-mounted always vertical (plumb line) when in use, circumstances require you to do so on a
running boards. Only use this jack when jacking especially on hills. Always try to use the jack hill, place the wheel chock and another
up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards on level surface. Make sure that the jack sizeable object as follows:
as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-
damaged. See separate instructions for 왘 Place the wheel chock and another
et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
scissors-type jack. sizeable object on the downhill side
capacity jackstands before working under
blocking both wheels of the axle not
the vehicle.
being worked on.
524
Practical hints
Flat tire
525
Practical hints
Flat tire
1 Alignment bolt 1 Wheel bolt for 19" and 20" light alloy
wheels
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel (locat-
remove it.
ed in vehicle tool kit (컄 page 495))
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied with the tool kit ! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mount-
ing the Minispare wheel. The use of any wheel
(컄 page 495).
bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare
왘 Remove the remaining bolts. wheel will damage the vehicle’s brakes.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
could result in damage to the bolts and wheel wheel hub.
hub threads.
왘 Remove the wheel.
526
Practical hints
Flat tire
527
Practical hints
Flat tire
528
Practical hints
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
왔 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air to position 3 (컄 page 41) and hold it
may be sucked into the fuel system. If this there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
happens, the ? malfunction indicator until the engine runs surge-free.
lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction
If the engine does not start:
indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on
and the engine may not start immediately 왘 Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
after refueling the vehicle. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
After refueling: to position 3 (컄 page 41) and hold it
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission until the engine runs surge-free.
is set to P.
If the engine still does not start, do not
The gear position indicator in the multi-
make any further attempts to start the
function display should be on P.
engine. Contact an authorized
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. Mercedes-Benz Light truck Center or call
Roadside Assistance (컄 page 336).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If necessary,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from i When the ? malfunction indicator lamp
the starter switch (컄 page 43). (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator
lamp (Canada only) has been illuminated for the
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
above condition, it will remain illuminated until
to position 2 for at least 10 seconds the engine was cycled on and off four times in a
(컄 page 41). row.
왘 Return the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 (컄 page 41).
529
Practical hints
Battery
530
Practical hints
Battery
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test- Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
ing intervals. Jump starting must only be done using the allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
As with any other battery, the battery may dis- jump-start contacts located in the engine skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
charge if the vehicle is not operated for an ex- compartment (컄 page 538). flush affected area with water and seek
tended period of time. You can connect a battery medical help if necessary.
maintenance charge unit tested and approved
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
for use on your vehicle model or disconnect the
battery to prevent battery discharge. Contact an which is flammable and explosive. Keep
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
for more information. improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
531
Practical hints
Battery
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling i With a disconnected battery you will no
clamps while the engine is running or the and reconnecting the battery longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
alternator and other electronic components start/stop button will have no effect.
could be severely damaged. Warning! G
Have the battery checked regularly by an Step 1 (Disconnecting)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and
reconnecting the battery is a complicated
i If your battery is discharged, the vehicle
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light must be jump started (컄 page 538) using the
Truck Center for further information. and technically demanding procedure that jump start contacts in the engine compartment,
also requires safety precautions to avoid the or an accessory battery charge unit* approved
Warning! G risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it
be performed by a qualified technician or an
by Mercedes-Benz must be connected using the
jump start contacts in the engine compartment
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck (see separate instructions for the accessory bat-
Do not place metal objects on the battery as tery charge unit*) before any of the following
this could result in a short circuit. Center only. Please read the instructions
steps can be performed. If the battery cannot be
fully before beginning operation and only
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk jumped or charged, please contact an
undertake it if you feel fully capable of authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
of acid burns in the event of an accident. performing all of the tasks involved as de-
scribed in these instructions. Observe all 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
safety instructions and precautions when position P (컄 page 194).
handling automotive batteries 왘 Firmly depress the parking brake
(컄 page 530). Performing the tasks involved (컄 page 68).
incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 69).
and impair the operating safety of the
vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you 왘 Leave the ignition switched on
or others. (컄 page 42).
532
Practical hints
Battery
i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you Step 2 (Disconnecting) Step 3 (Disconnecting)
had the vehicle jump started:
앫 Leave the engine running.
앫 Complete step 1, starting with switching off
all electrical consumers.
앫 Continue with step 2.
앫 When the front passenger seat is in the most
forward position, turn off the engine.
왘 Switch off all electrical consumers.
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 530). 1 Battery cover 2 Perforated floor carpet
왘 Enter the rear passenger compartment 왘 Cut the floor carpet 2 along the
왘 Open the front passenger door.
and remove main battery cover 1. dotted white line (see illustration) until
i Open doors only when conditions are safe to you reach the perforated part. Start
do so. cutting at the point indicated by the
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the arrows. Cut carpet using a sharp object
most forward position (컄 page 46). (knife etc.).
왘 Enter the front passenger compart-
ment.
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the
most rearward position (컄 page 46). 컄컄
533
Practical hints
Battery
534
Practical hints
Battery
535
Practical hints
Battery
536
Practical hints
Battery
왘 Connect the positive lead to the posi- Charging the battery 왘 Charge the battery in accordance with
tive terminal and fasten it’s cover the instructions of the battery charger
(컄 page 535). If the battery is discharged, the battery can manufacturer.
be charged using the jump-start contacts
왘 Connect the negative lead to the nega- Batteries contain materials that can harm
located in the engine compartment
tive terminal (컄 page 535). the environment if disposed of improperly.
(컄 page 539).
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
! Never invert the terminal connections! lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
i The following procedures must be carried Warning! G method of disposal. Many states require
out following any interruption of battery power sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
(e.g. due to reconnection): Never charge a battery while still installed in for recycling.
앫 Set the clock (컄 page 176). the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
Vehicles with COMAND system with naviga-
tion module*: Time and date are set auto- being used. Gases may escape during charg-
matically. ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
앫 Synchronize the door windows
(컄 page 251). An accessory battery charge unit specially
앫 Synchronize the power tilt/sliding sunroof* adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
(컄 page 255). tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
앫 Synchronize the power folding exterior rear available, permitting the charging of the
view mirrors* (컄 page 212). battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
537
Practical hints
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- parts that move when the engine is
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: started or running.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed ! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. using the jump-start contacts located
in the engine compartment ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
Never lean over batteries while connecting attempts.
(컄 page 539).
or jump starting, you might get injured. Do not attempt to start the engine using a
앫 Jump starting should only be performed battery quick charge unit.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
when the engine and catalytic
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, If the engine does not run after several unsuc-
converter1 are cold. cessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
flush affected area with water, and seek
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Center.
medical help if necessary.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt-
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start- ic converter1.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid ing with a higher voltage battery could
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
improper connection of jumper cables, damage the vehicle’s electrical system, or missing insulation.
smoking, etc. which will not be covered by the
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. other metal part while the other end is still at-
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient tached to a battery.
injury. cross-section and insulated terminal
Read all instructions before proceeding. clamps.
1
Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
538
Practical hints
Jump starting
539
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
540
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on ! Towing of the vehicle should only be done
Warning! G the ground: using the properly installed towing eye bolt.
앫 The automatic transmission must be in Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
With the engine not running, there is no position N (컄 page 193). the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
앫 The starter switch must be in position 2 i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
(컄 page 41). the ground, note the following:
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
Keep in mind that it is important that the With the automatic central locking activated and
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
starter switch is in position 2. As soon as the the starter switch in position 2 (컄 page 41), the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. SmartKey is removed from the starter vehicle doors lock if a wheel is turning at a speed
switch or the engine is turned off with of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or above.
KEYLESS-GO* and you open the driver’s To prevent the vehicle doors from locking,
door or the front passenger door, the auto- deactivate the automatic central locking
matic transmission will shift to park (컄 page 130).
position P, see “Starter switch positions”
(컄 page 41). i To signal turns while being towed with
앫 The battery must be connected and charged. hazard warning flasher in use, set the starter
switch to position 2 and activate combination
Otherwise, the starter switch cannot be set
switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner
to position 2 and the automatic transmission
– only the selected turn signal will operate.
will remain locked in position P.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
541
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Depending on whether you are towing a i The cover 1 is secured to the bumper by a
plastic cord.
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing
eye bolt can be screwed into threaded 왘 Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by
holes which are located behind covers on the arrow.
the right-hand side of each bumper. 왘 Lift off cover 1 to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
542
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing cover
왘 Engage cover 1 at top and press at
bottom.
Stranded vehicle
543
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have Before replacing fuses:
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. the cause determined and rectified by an
왘 Apply parking brake (컄 page 68).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-
Center. 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
tems secured by that fuse will stop operat-
is set to P (컄 page 194).
ing. The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses. They are included with the The gear position indicator in the multi-
function display should be on P.
Warning! G vehicle tool kit (컄 page 495):
앫 Fuse chart 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 41).
The fuse chart explains the fuse alloca-
with the specified amperage for the system
tion and fuse amperages. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap- 앫 Spare fuses switch.
proved fuses or using repaired or bridged 앫 Fuse extractor Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
The electrical fuses are located in different 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
fuse boxes: the starter switch in position 0,
components and/or systems. Have the
same as with the SmartKey re-
cause determined and remedied by an au- 앫 Fuse box in engine compartment
moved from the starter switch). The
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. (컄 page 545)
driver’s door then can be closed
앫 Fuse box in cargo compartment again.
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro- (컄 page 545)
priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage 앫 Fuse box in passenger compartment
recommended in the fuse chart. Any (컄 page 546)
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to
advise you on this subject.
544
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in engine compartment ! The fuse box cover must be installed Removing/installing cover
properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from
왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 124).
The fuse box is located on the passenger entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse
side of the engine compartment. operation. 왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin
왘 Close the hood after checking or re- into the slot of lock 1 (컄 page 545).
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 379).
placing fuses (컄 page 380). 왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°
in direction of arrow.
Fuse box in cargo compartment
왘 Remove cover 2.
The fuse box is located in the cargo com- 왘 Install cover 2 in reverse order.
partment behind the passenger side trim
panel.
545
Practical hints
Fuses
546
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
547
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
necessary technical data for your vehicle. Centers maintain a stock of Genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
gically located parts distribution centers Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s
durability or safety.
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
548
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Center will exchange or repair any defec- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
tive parts originally installed on the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
in accordance with the terms of the follow- for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
ing warranties:
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
549
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2 Paintwork code
3 VIN 2 Paintwork code
can be found in the following locations:
3 VIN
앫 on the certification label
i Data shown on certification label are for
앫 embossed underneath the illustration purpose only. These data are specific
passenger-side second-row rear seat to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
(컄 page 551) the illustration. Refer to certification label on
vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
앫 on the lower edge of the windshield
(컄 page 551)
550
Technical data
Identification labels
551
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
552
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model GL 320 CDI (164.8221) GL 450 (164.8711)
Engine 642 273
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke engine 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) 3.38 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 182 cu in (2987 cm3) 285 cu in (4663 cm3)
Compression ratio 17.7:1 10.7:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 215 hp/4000 rpm 335 hp/6000 rpm 2
(160 kW/4000 rpm) (250 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 400 lb-ft/1600 - 2400 rpm 339 lb-ft/2700 - 5000 rpm
(543 Nm/1600 - 2400 rpm) (460 Nm/2700 - 5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 4500 rpm 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2035 mm 2404 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
553
Technical data
Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and ! Using tires other than those approved by The tire inflation pressure should be checked
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best such as tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
possible performance in conjunction with the recommendation included with vehicle.
앫 poor handling characteristics
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your 앫 increased noise i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
vehicle and tested and approved by 앫 increased fuel consumption vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the available as standard or optional factory equip-
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
following on the tire’s sidewall: ment, but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen-
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment sional variations and different tire deformation Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
tires characteristics that could cause them to come Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
Using tires other than those approved by into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the configuration on your vehicle (Appearance
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited result. Package, etc.), equipping your vehicle with win-
Warranty. ter tires approved for your vehicle model may
i Further information on tires and rims is also require the purchase of two or four wheel
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
rims of the recommended size for use with these
Truck Center. A placard with the recommended
winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tire inflation pressure is located on the driver’s
Light Truck Center for more information.
door B-pillar (컄 page 550). Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire inflation pressure infor-
mation for driving at high speeds (컄 page 395)
or for vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 395). If such
information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
554
Technical data
Rims and tires
555
Technical data
Rims and tires
Minispare wheel
556
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model GL 450
Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs NGK PLKR6A
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
557
Technical data
Main Dimensions
558
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Roof load max. 198 lb (90 kg)
559
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Capacities
Warning! G For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
Vehicle components and their respective
Comply with all valid regulations with re- contact with your skin or clothing.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by spect to handling, storing and disposing of If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
Mercerdes-Benz. service fluids. Otherwise you could physician immediately.
endanger persons or the environment.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or Keep service fluids out of the reach of
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz children.
Light Truck Center.
560
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
561
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Engine oils are specifically tested for their ! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
suitability in our engines and durability for They may damage the engine. Warning! G
our service intervals. Therefore, only use Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending
approved engine oils and oil filters oil additives are not covered by the During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
required for vehicles with Maintenance Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the brake fluid is continuously reduced
System. For a listing of approved engine through the absorption of moisture from the
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Air conditioning refrigerant atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous
Approved Service Products pamphlet operating conditions, this moisture content
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
(USA only), or contact an authorized can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
lubricating oil are used in the air
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. system, thus reducing the system’s
conditioning system. efficiency.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly ! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
required for the Maintenance System, or chang- lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
ing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer will occur.
Maintenance Booklet for replacement inter-
than those called for by the Maintenance System val.
will result in engine or emission control system
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. Only brake fluid approved by
Please follow Maintenance System recommen- Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
dations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
so will result in engine or emission control Center will provide you with additional
system damage not covered by the information.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
562
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and per- Fuel requirements
(gasoline engine) formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-
able and low octane fuel is used, follow these Gasoline engine
Warning! G precautions: Only use premium unleaded fuel:
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
앫 The octane number (posted at the
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
It burns violently and can cause serious
possible. of both the Research Octane Number
personal injury.
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
(RON) and the Motor Octane Number
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
acceleration.
rials near gasoline! known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
Turn off the engine before refueling. if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- as two persons and no luggage. such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator used provided the ratio of any one of these
extinguish all smoking materials. pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or oxygenates to gasoline does not
operating in mountainous terrain. exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
health. exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
563
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
These blends must also meet all other fuel Gasoline additives (gasoline engine) In areas where carbon deposits may be
requirements, such as resistance to spark encountered due to lack of availability of
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. A major concern among engine gasolines which contain these additives,
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
Diesel engine by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved by us for use on
only the use of quality gasoline containing Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the
Only use commercially available vehicular
additives that prevent the build-up of Factory Approved Service Products
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
carbon deposits. pamphlet (USA only) or contact an
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
After an extended period of using fuels authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with Center for a listing of approved product(s).
without such additives carbon deposits
improved cold flow characteristics is of- Follow directions on product label.
can build up, especially on the intake
fered in the winter months. Check with
valves and in the combustion area, leading Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
your fuel retailer.
to engine performance problems such as: This only results in unnecessary costs and
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not 앫 Warm-up hesitation may be harmful to the engine operation.
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
fuel system and engine will otherwise be 앫 Unstable idle ! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor
damaged, which is not covered by the fuel quality or from blending additional fuel
앫 Knocking/pinging additives other than those tested and approved
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫 Misfire by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
앫 Power loss Warranty.
564
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
565
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. Failure to use such Before the start of the winter season (or
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result once a year in hot southern regions), you
components in motor vehicle engines in a significantly shortened service life. should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also
Therefore, the following product is strongly
coolant used in such engines be regularly checked each time you bring your
recommended for use in your vehicle:
specifically formulated to protect the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Light Truck Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
566
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
567
568
Index
A Air conditioning refrigerant 562 Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 210
ABS 103 Air conditioning system see Antiglare, Rear view mirrors* 211
Indicator lamp 436 Climate control or Antilock Brake System see ABS
Messages in the Automatic climate control (3-zone)* Anti-theft systems 112
multifunction display 453 Air conditioning, Cooling 226, 241 Anti-theft alarm system 111, 112
Off-road - ABS 104 Air distribution, Front 221, 236 Immobilizer 111
Accelerator position, automatic Air distribution, Rear 229, 245 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
transmission 198 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Armrest storage compartments
Accessory weight 415 Air recirculation mode 224, 239 Front 318
Accident 67 Air suspension package 280 Ashtrays* 322
Active head restraint 92, 135, 504 Adaptive Damping System Aspect ratio 415
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 280 (ADS)* 280 ATF 382
Air bags 76 Messages in the Attaching a trailer 368
Children 77, 93 multifunction display 490 Audio menu 166
Front passenger front air bag off Vehicle level control 281 CD operation 167
indicator lamp 31, 32, 85 Air vents 229 Radio operation 166
Front, Driver 79 Air vents*, Rear 246 Satellite radio* operation
Front, Passenger 79 Air vents, Front 222, 236 (USA only) 166
Occupant Classification System* Air volume 222, 237 Auto-dimming*, Rear view mirrors 211
(OCS) 81 Alarm system see Anti-theft systems Automatic central locking,
Safety guidelines 78 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 496, 526 Control system 183
Side impact (front and rear*) 80 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 561, 566
Window curtain 80
569
Index
570
Index
Battery, Vehicle 530 Button for Voice control* system 30, Central locking
Charging 537 158 Automatic 130
Disconnecting and connecting 532 Locking/unlocking from the
C
Jump starting 538 inside 130
California retail buyers and lessees,
Removing and installing 532 Switch 130
Important notice for 11
Bead 416 Certification label 550
Camera see Rear view camera*
Beverage holder see Cup holder CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
Can holder see Cup holder
Bi-Xenon headlamps* see headlamps lamp 439, 440
Capacities and recommended
Bolts, Spare wheel 499 Checking tire pressure electronically with
fuel/lubricants 560
Brake fluid 562 the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
Card holder 33, 37, 321
Checking 377 System (Advanced TPMS)*,
Cargo compartment cover blind 312
Messages in the (Canada only) 402
Cargo net* 313
multifunction display 472 Checking tire pressure electronically with
Cargo tie-down rings 304
Brake lamp the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Carpets, Cleaning 433
Cleaning lenses 429 (TPMS), (USA only) 399
Carriers* 297
Messages in the Checklist
Catalytic converter
multifunction display 481 Off-road driving 359
(gasoline engine) 373
Replacing bulbs 515 Returning from off-road driving 365
CD changer 167, 316
Brake pads 350
CD player 167
Messages in the
Center console
multifunction display 470
Lower part 33
Brakes 350
Upper part (Vehicles with
Warning lamp 437
enhanced off-road package*) 32
Break-in period 348
Upper part (Vehicles without
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
enhanced off-road package*) 31
571
Index
Children in the vehicle 93 Rear window defroster 215 Control system menus 157
Air bags 77, 93 Residual engine heat (REST) 227 Audio 166
Blocking rear door window Clock 27, 176 DISTRONIC* 169
operation 100 Setting time 176 NAV* 168
Indicator lamp, Front passenger front Cloth upholstery, Cleaning and Off-road 168
air bag 85, 87, 450 care of 434 Settings 170
Infant and child restraint systems 88, Cockpit 24 Standard display 164
94 Cockpit Management and Data System TEL* 189
LATCH-type child seat anchors 97 see COMAND System Trip computer 187
Occupant Classification System* Cold tire inflation pressure 416 Vehicle configuration 185
(OCS) 81 Collapsible wheel chock 498 Vehicle status message memory 169
Cigarette lighter* 324 COMAND System see separate operating Control system submenus 161, 163, 173
Climate control 216 instructions Comfort* 184
Air conditioning refrigerant 561 Combination switch 63, 65, 149 Instrument cluster 174, 175
Air conditioning, Cooling 226, 227 Compass 345 Lighting 178
Air distribution, Front 221 Adjustment 181 Time/Date 176
Air distribution, rear 229 Calibration 182 Vehicle 181
Air recirculation mode 224 Calling up the compass 345 Coolant 382, 565
Air vents*, second-row seats 222 Control and operation of radio Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
Air vents, Front 222 transmitters 372 and quantity 566
Air volume 222 Control system 157 Capacities 560
Control panel*, Rear 228 Multifunction display 157 Checking coolant level 377, 382
Control panel, Front 218 Multifunction steering wheel 158 Messages in the
Deactivating system 220 Resetting to factory default 171 multifunction display 473, 475
Defogging 224 Temperature 374
Defrosting 223 Temperature display 164
572
Index
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 150 Delayed shut-off Outside temperature 157, 165
Messages in the Exterior lamps 179 Selecting 175
multifunction display 481 Interior lighting 180 Symbol messages 469
Replacing bulbs 514 Department of Transportation see DOT Text messages 453
Crossing obstacles 363 Diesel engine Vehicle status message 170, 451
Cruise control 257 Preglow indicator lamp 29 Vehicle system settings, Control
Activating 259 Differential locks* 206 system 161, 163, 170
Messages in the A few words about 206 Distance to empty (range), Trip
multifunction display 454 Messages in the Computer 187
Cup holders 321 multifunction display 493 Distronic* 262
Cleaning 322 Switching 207 Activating 268
Front center console 322 Difficulties Cleaning system sensor 430
Front center console, While driving 66 Control system 266
Removing/Installing 322 While starting 60 Deactivating 270
Rear armrest 321 Digital clock see Clock Distance warning function* 274
Curb weight 416 Digital speedometer 157, 165 Distance warning function*
Dimensions, Vehicle 558 activating/deactivating 186
D
Direction of rotation (tires) 388 Driving hints 272
Date display, Setting 176, 177
Displays Messages in the
Daytime running lamp mode 147
Digital speedometer 157, 165 multifunction display 455
Setting 178
Distronic* 265 Sensor cover 430
Deep water see Standing water
Maintenance service indicator 422 Warning and indicator lamps 265
Defogging windshield 223, 237
Messages in the
Defrosting, Front 223, 237
multifunction display 451
Defrosting, Rear 215
Multifunction display 157
573
Index
574
Index
575
Index
ETD 91, 445 Fluids Front passenger front air bag off indicator
Safety guidelines 78 Automatic transmission fluid 382, lamp 31, 32, 85
Expanding cargo compartment 306 560 Front seat heat restraints see
Exterior rear view mirrors 52, 211 Brake fluid 378, 561, 562 Head restraints
Folding 212 Capacities 560 Front towing eye 542
Power folding* 211 Engine coolant 378, 382, 561, 565 Fuel 376, 561
Synchronizing 212 Engine oil 381, 560, 562 Additives 564
Power steering fluid 561 Capacities, Fuel tank 561
F
Windshield washer and headlamp Consumption statistics 187, 188
Fastening the seat belts 54
cleaning system* 378, 567 Filling the tank 375
Filler neck, Engine oil 382
Fog lamps 148 Fuel filler flap and cap 375, 501
First aid kit 495
Corner-illuminating Fuel gauge 29
Flat tire 523
front fog lamps* 150 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 29,
Lifting the vehicle 524
Messages in the 442
Lowering the vehicle 528
multifunction display 481 Premium unleaded gasoline 376,
Minispare wheel 499
Rear fog lamp 149 561, 563
Mounting the spare wheel 524
Replacing bulbs 514 Requirements, Octane rating 563
Preparing the vehicle 524
4-ETS 109 Fuel cap
Floormats* 326
Off-road - 4-ETS 110 Messages in the
Front air bags 79 multifunction display 478
Front defroster 223, 237
Front lamps see Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag 74, 79
Messages in the multifunction
display 463, 464, 465, 466
576
Index
577
Index
578
Index
Instruments and controls see Cockpit Closing, Power tailgate* 128 Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof*
Interior lighting 151 Factory setting 116 (Convenience closing feature) 252
Delayed shut-off 180 Locking/unlocking 40, 71, 114 Closing/locking, Power
Interior rear view mirror 52 Locking/unlocking, Global tailgate* 129
Antiglare positions 210 setting 116 Factory setting 120
Auto-dimming mirrors* 211 Loss of 122 Important notes 119
Interior storage spaces see Messages in the Locking/unlocking 41, 71, 117
Storage compartments multifunction display 480 Locking/unlocking, Global
Intermittent wiping Opening the power windows setting 120
Windshield wipers 64 (Summer opening feature) 251 Loss of 122
Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof* Messages in the
J
(Summer opening feature) 251 multifunction display 479, 480
Jack 496, 497
Remote control 114 Opening the power windows
Lifting the vehicle 524
Replacing batteries 506 (Summer opening feature) 251
Jump starting 538
Selective setting 116 Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
K Starter switch positions 42 (Summer opening feature) 251
Key, Mechanical 500 Starting the engine 57 Remote control 117
Key, SmartKey 114 Turning off the engine 70 Replacing batteries 506
Batteries 122, 506 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Selective setting 121
Battery check lamp 114 Batteries 122, 506 Start/stop button 43
Checking battery condition 122 Battery check lamp 117 Starter switch positions 42, 43
Closing the power windows Checking battery condition 122 Starting the engine 59
(Convenience closing feature) 252 Closing the power windows Turning off the engine 70
Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof* (Convenience closing feature) 252
(Convenience closing feature) 252
579
Index
Kickdown 198 Lamps, indicator and warning Preglow indicator, Diesel engine 29
Kilopascal 416 ABS 27, 436 Seat belt telltale 29, 91, 443
Adaptive Damping System Seat belts 444
L
(ADS)* 281 Seat heating* 140
Labels 550
Alarm system 112 Seat ventilation* 142
Certification 550
Battery (SmartKey with SRS 29, 74, 91, 445
Emission control information 551
KEYLESS-GO*) 121 Turn signals 27
Engine number 551
Battery (SmartKey) 116 Vehicle level control 283, 285
Paintwork code 550
Brakes 27, 437, 438 Language, Setting 174
Vacuum line routing diagram 551
Center console 31, 32, 448 LATCH-type child seat anchors see
Vehicle Identification Number
CHECK ENGINE 29, 439, 440 Children in the vehicle
(VIN) 550
Differential locks* 207 Layout of poly-V-belt drive (GL 450) 552
Lamp sensor see Light sensor
Distance warning lamp* 265 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Lamps, exterior 509
Downhill Speed Regulation 276 (GL 320 CDI) 552
Front 509
Engine diagnostics 29, 439, 440 Leather upholstery*, Cleaning and
Light sensor, Messages in the
ESP® 27, 441, 442 care of 434
multifunction display 483
Fog lamps, Front/rear 145 Lever for cruise control 257
Messages in display 481
Front passenger front air bag off 31, License plate lamps 518
Messages in the multifunction
32, 80, 87, 450 Messages in the
display 481, 483, 485
Fuel reserve 29, 442 multifunction display 483
Rear 509
High beam headlamps 29 Replacing bulbs 509, 518
Switch 145
Instrument cluster 26, 28, 436, 437, Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 432
438, 439, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, Light sensor
445, 446 Messages in the
Off-road driving program 280 multifunction display 483
Parktronic* 292 Lighter see Cigarette lighter*
580
Index
581
Index
582
Index
583
Index
584
Index
Rear lamps see Tail lamps Replacing bulbs 508 Reporting safety defects 19
Rear panorama roof, Sunshade 214 Additional turn signals, Research Octane Number see RON
Rear seat head restraints see Exterior rear view mirrors 515 Reset button, In instrument cluster 171
Head restraints Backup lamps 508, 509, 515 Reset tool
Rear towing eye 542 Brake lamps 508, 509, 515 Active head restraints,
Rear view camera* 295 Corner-illuminating front fog Depository 504
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors lamps* 508, 509, 514 Residual heat and ventilation 227, 242
Rear window defroster 215 Fog lamp, Rear 508, 509, 515 Reverse gear position, Automatic
Rear window wiper/washer 65 Fog lamps, Front 508, 509, 514 transmission 192
Rear windows see Power windows High beam headlamps 508, 509, 512 Rims 417, 554
Rear wiper blade 521 License plate lamps 508, 509, 518 Roadside Assistance 12
Recommended tire inflation Low beam headlamps 508, 509, 511 Roadside Assistance button see Tele Aid
pressure 417 Parking/standing lamps 508, 509, RON 376, 563
Recovery services, 513, 515, 517 Roof rails 297
Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 339 Side marker lamps, Front 508, 509, Rubber parts, Cleaning 432
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 562 511, 514 Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 397
Refueling 375 Side marker lamps, Rear 508, 509,
S
Regular checks 377 515, 517
Safety
Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts, Telltale Tail lamps 508, 509, 515, 517
Driving safety systems 103
Remote control Turn signal lamps, Front 508, 509,
Occupant safety 74
SmartKey 114 513
Reporting safety defects 19
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 117 Turn signal lamps, Rear 508, 509,
Safety belts see Seat belts
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 338 515, 517
Satellite radio* 166
Seat belt force limiter 91
585
Index
586
Index
Vehicle level control 281 Spinning see Tires, Direction of rotation Storage compartments 36, 316
Shifting SRS 90 Armrest, Front 318
Automatic transmission 58, 192 Indicator lamp 29, 445 Cup holder 321
Side impact air bags 80 Messages in the Cup holders 321
Side marker lamps multifunction display 445 Door pockets 36
Cleaning lenses 429 Standing lamps 145 Front center console 318
Messages in the Replacing bulbs 508, 509, 513, 515, Glove box 316
multifunction display 484 517 Parcel net, Front passenger
Replacing bulbs 514, 517 Standing water, Driving through 362 footwell 320
Side windows see Power windows Starter switch 25, 42 Parcel nets, Front seat backrest 320
Sidewall 417 Positions 42 Rear seats, In front of 319
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey Starting difficulties, Engine 60 Storing tires 387
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey with Starting, Engine 57 Stranded vehicle 543
KEYLESS-GO* Steep terrain, Driving 360 Submenus see Control system submenus
Snow chains 421 Steering column 50, 51 Sun visors 213
Snow tires see Winter tires Steering wheel 49 Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Spare fuses 495 Adjustment, Electrically* 51 Sunshade
Spare wheel 499 Adjustment, Manually 50 Rear panorama roof 214
Mounting 524 Buttons 30, 158 Suspension tuning see Air suspension
Wheel bolts 496, 526 Cleaning 433 package
Speed settings Steering wheel gearshift control, Symbols used in this Operator’s
Cruise control 259 Automatic transmission 201 Manual 16
Distronic* 268 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 339
Speedometer 27, 265
587
Index
588
Index
Hands-free microphone 34 Tether attachment points, see Children in Tire inflation pressure
Inserting in cradle 330 the vehicle Checking manually 396
Installing a different mobile phone Third-row sunshade 214 Checking tire pressure electronically
cradle 331 Three-zone Automatic climate control see with the Advanced Tire Pressure
Messages in the Automatic climate control (3-zone) * Monitoring System (Advanced
multifunction display 487 Ticket holder 321 TPMS)*, (Canada only) 402
Operation 189 Tie-down rings 304 Checking tire pressure electronically
Phone book 190 Tightening torque with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Redialing 191 Screws, Basic cross bars* 300, 301, System (TPMS), (USA only) 399
Rejecting/ending a call 190 302 Recommended tire inflation
Removing from cradle 331 Wheel bolts 528 pressure 394
Tray 318 Tilt/sliding sunroof* see Power tilt/sliding Tires 385, 554
Temperature sunroof* Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
Coolant 164 Time 176 System (Advanced TPMS)*,
Display mode, Status indicator 175 TIN 410, 417 (Canada only) 402
Interior temperature 221 Tire and Loading Information Air pressure 415
Interior temperature, setting see Placard 389 Care and maintenance 386
Climate control or Automatic climate Terminology 415 Chains 421
control (3-zone)* Tire Identification Number see TIN Cleaning 387
Outside temperature 165 Combination low tire pressure/TPMS
Sensor, Interior temperature 218, malfunction telltale, USA only 27
232 Direction of rotation, Spinning 388
Sensor, Outside temperature 156 Driving instructions 353
Setting display unit 165 Hydroplaning 354
Important guidelines 385
589
Index
590
Index
591
Index
Vehicle status message memory Warranty coverage 10, 549 Windshield washer fluid
menu 169 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Messages in the
Vehicle tool kit 495 Washer reservoir level 567 multifunction display 487
Vehicle washing 427 Washing the vehicle 425 Mixing ratio 567
VIN 551 Wear pattern, Tires 419 Refilling 384
Voice control system* Weights, Vehicle 559 Reservoir level 384
Button on multifunction steering Wheel Wiping with 65
wheel 30, 158 Bolts 496 Windshield washer system 384, 567
Hands-free microphone 34 Change 524 Windshield wipers 63
Removing 526 Cleaning wiper blades 431
W
Spare 499, 524 Fast continuous wiping 64
Warning indicators
Tightening torque 528 Fast intermittent wiping 64
Parktronic* 292
Wheel, Tires and 385 Rear window wiper/washer 65
Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
Wheels Replacing wiper blades 520
warning
Sizes 555 Slow continuous wiping 64
Warning sounds
Window curtain air bags 80 Slow intermittent wiping 64
Distance warning function* 274
Windows see Power windows Winter driving 420
Distronic* 265
Windows, cleaning 431 Snow chains 421
Exterior lamps 145
Windshield Tires 420
Parking brake 61
Cleaning 431 Winter driving instructions 355
Parktronic* 294
Cleaning wiper blades 431 Winter tires 420
Seat belt telltale 88
Cleaning, Windshield washer fluid 65 Wood trims, cleaning 434
Defogging 224, 238
Infrared reflecting* 345
Washer fluid 384, 561, 567
592
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle
properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.